2007 Hyundai Terracan 33

A000A01A-GAT
This Owner's Manual should be considered a part of the car and remain with it when it is sold for the use of the
next owner.
OWNER'S I.D.
ORIGINAL NAME:
ADDRESS: STREET:
TOWN:
COUNTRY:
P.CODE:
DATE OF SALE:
SUBSEQUENT NAME:
ADDRESS: STREET:
TOWN:
COUNTRY:
P.CODE:
TRANSFER DATE:
OWNER'S MANUAL
A030A01HP-GAT
Operation
Maintenance
Specifications
A030A01HP
All information in the Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. Hyundai reserves the right to make
changes at any time so that our policy of continual product improvement may be carried out.
This manual applies to current Hyundai models and includes descriptions and explanations of
optional as well as standard equipment. As a result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply to
your specific vehicle.
Please note that some models are equipped with Right-Hand Drive (RHD). The explanations and
illustrations for some operations in RHD models are opposite of those written in this manual.
A020A01A-AAT
RESPONSIBILITY FOR MAINTENANCE
The maintenance requirements for your new Hyundai are found in Section 5. As the
owner, it is your responsibility to see that all maintenance operations specified by the
manufacturer are carried out at the appropriate intervals. When the vehicle is used
in severe driving conditions, more frequent maintenance is required for some
operations. Maintenance requirements for severe operating conditions are also
included in Section 5.
A040A01A-AAT
FOREWORD
Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of
discriminating people who drive Hyundai. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction
of each Hyundai we build is something of which we're very proud.
Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is
suggested that you read it carefully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to
the satisfaction you receive from your new car.
The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed
by an authorized Hyundai dealer. Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service,
maintenance and any other assistance that may be required.
A050A02HP-GAT
HYUNDAI MOTOR COMPANY
Note: Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this
Hyundai, please leave the manual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.
! CAUTION:
Severe engine and transmission damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and
lubricants that do not meet Hyundai specifications. You must always use high quality fuels
and lubricants that meet the specifications listed on Page 9-4 in the Vehicle Specifications
section of the Owner's Manual.
Copyright 2006 Hyundai Motor Company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be
reproduced, stored in any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the
prior written permission of Hyundai Motor Company.
A070A01A-GAT
! CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI
Modification of components may void the manufacturer's warranty

Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way. Modifications may adversely affect
the safety, durability and performance of your Hyundai. Components which are
subjected to modification or are added to the vehicle resulting in consequential
damage are not covered by the vehicle manufacturer's warranty.
A080A01S-AAT
TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic compo-
nents. It is possible for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular
telephone to adversely affect electronic systems. For this reason, we recommend
that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instructions or consult your Hyundai
dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you choose to install one
of these devices.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY 3
CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE 4
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS 5

SECTION 6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS 7
CONSUMER INFORMATION 8
VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS 9
INDEX 10
A090A01A-AAT
SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING
This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE.

These titles indicate the following:
! WARNING:
This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to
you or other persons if the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided
with the warning.
! CAUTION:
This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its
equipment if the caution is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the
caution.
NOTE:
This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.
A100A01L-GAT facturing requirements. Using imi- The export specifications are writ-
GUIDE TO HYUNDAI GENUINE tation, counterfeit or used salvage ten in English only.
PARTS parts are not covered under the
Hyundai New Vehicle Limited War- Hyundai Genuine Parts are only
1. What are Hyundai Genuine Parts? ranty or any other Hyundai war- sold through authorized Hyundai
Hyundai Genuine Parts are the same ranty. In addition, any damage to or Dealership and Service Center.
parts used by Hyundai Motor Com- failure of Genuine Hyundai Parts
pany to manufacture vehicles. They caused by the installation or failure
are designed and tested for the of an imitation, counterfeit or used
optimum safety, performance, and salvage part is not covered by
reliability to our customers. Hyundai Motor Company.
3. How can you tell if you purchas-

2. Why should you use genuine ing Hyundai Genuine Parts?
parts?
Look for the Hyundai Genuine Parts
Hyundai Genuine Parts are engi- Logo on the package (see below).
neered and built to meet rigid manu-
A100A03L
A100A01L A100A02L A100A04L

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
(LEFT-HAND DRIVE)
B250A03HP-GAT
B250A01HP
1. Multi-Function Light Switch/ Front Fog Light Switch 15. Multi Box
2. Instrument Cluster 16. Steering Wheel Tilt Lever (If Installed)
3. Horn and Driver's Airbag (If Installed) 17. Remote Fuel-Filler Lid Release Lever
4. Rear Fog Light Switch (If Installed) 18. Cruise Control Switch (If Installed)
5. Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch 19. Cigarette Lighter/ Front Ashtray
6. Panel Brightness Control Knob (Rheostat Switch) 20. Coin Holder
(If Installed) 21. Shift Lever
7. Hazard Warning Switch 22. Seat Warmer Switch (If Installed)
8. Cruise Control Main Switch (If Installed) 23. Front Power Outlet
9. Headlight Leveling Switch (If Installed) 24. Transfer Shift Knob
10. Audio System (If Installed) 25. Parking Brake
11. Heating/Air Conditioning Control Panel 26. Front Drink Holder
12. Glove Box 27. Rear Power Outlet
13. Passenger's Airbag (If Installed) 28. Rear Drink Holder
14. Hood Release Lever 29. Rear Ashtray
! CAUTION:
When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside the vehicle, do not place it near the
instrument cluster nor on the instrument panel surface. If there is any leakage from the air
freshener onto these areas (Instrument cluster, instrument panel or air ventilator), it may
damage these parts. If the liquid from air freshener does leak onto these areas, wash them
with water immediately.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
(RIGHT-HAND DRIVE)
B250B03HP-GAT
B250B01HP
1. Passenger's Airbag (If Installed) 15. Rear Drink Holder
2. Glove Box 16. Rear Power Outlet
3. Heating/Air Conditioning Control Panel 17. Front Drink Holder
4. Audio System (If Installed) 18. Parking Brake
5. Headlight Leveling Switch (If Installed) 19. Transfer Shift Knob
6. Cruise Control Main Switch (If Installed) 20. Front Power Outlet
7. Hazard Warning Switch 21. Seat Warmer Switch (If Installed)
8. Panel Brightness Control Knob (Rheostat Switch) 22. Shift Lever
(If Installed) 23. Coin Holder
9. Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch 24. Cigarette Lighter/ Front Ashtray
10. Rear Fog Light Switch (If Installed) 25. Steering Wheel Tilt Lever (If Installed)
11. Horn and Driver's Airbag (If Installed) 26. Cruise Control Switch (If Installed)
12. Instrument Cluster 27. Remote Fuel-Filler Lid Release Lever
13. Multi-Function Light Switch/ Front Fog Light Switch 28. Multi Box
14. Rear Ashtray 29. Hood Release Lever
! CAUTION:
When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside the vehicle, do not place it near the
instrument cluster nor on the instrument panel surface. If there is any leakage from the air
freshener onto these areas (Instrument cluster, instrument panel or air ventilator), it may
damage these parts. If the liquid from air freshener does leak onto these areas, wash them
with water immediately.
YOUR VEHICLE AT A GLANCE
B255A01HP-GAT
INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Turn Signal Indicator Lights Seat Belt Warning Light
ABS Service Reminder Indicator (SRI)
Cruise Indicator Light (If Installed)
(If Installed)
High Beam Indicator Light O/D OFF Indicator Light (If Installed)
Low Oil Pressure Warning Light A/T(Automatic Transmission)

Oil Temperature Warning Light (If Installed)
Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level
Immobilizer Warning Indicator Light (If Installed)
Warning Light
Charging System Warning Light 4WD LOW Indicator Light
Front Fog Indicator Light 4WD HIGH Indicator Light (Part-time 4WD only)
Door Ajar Warning Light 4WD System Warning Light (Full-time 4WD only)
Low Fuel Level Warning Light Fuel Filter Warning Light (Diesel Engine)
Tail Gate Open Warning Light Brake Vacuum Warning Light (Diesel Engine)
SRS (Airbag) Service Reminder
Diesel Preheat Indicator Light (Diesel Engine)
Indicator (SRI) (If Installed)
Malfunction Indicator Light (If Installed)
* More detailed explanations of these items will be found beginning on page 1-58.
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
Fuel Recommendations ............................................... 1-2

Breaking In Your New Hyundai .................................... 1-3 1
Keys.............................................................................. 1-4
Immobilizer System ...................................................... 1-5
Door Locks ................................................................. 1-11
Theft-Alarm System .................................................... 1-13
Power Windows .......................................................... 1-17
Seats .......................................................................... 1-18
1
Seat Belts ................................................................... 1-31
Child Restraint System ............................................... 1-39
Supplemental Restraint (AIRBAG) System ............... 1-48
Instrument Cluster and Indicator Lights ..................... 1-54
Warning and Indicator Lights ..................................... 1-58
Multimeter ................................................................... 1-69
Multi-function Light Switch ......................................... 1-73
Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch................................1-75
Sunroof ........................................................................1-83
Mirror ........................................................................... 1-88
Hood Release ..............................................................1-97
Cruise Control ............................................................1-101
Heating and Cooling Control ......................................1-104
Stereo Sound System ...............................................1-120
Audio System ............................................................1-122
Antenna .....................................................................1-141
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
2 FUEL RECOMMENDATIONS
B010A02O-GAT If leaded gasoline is used, it will cause o Above -5°C (23°F) ... Summer type
Use Unleaded Gasoline the catalytic converter to become inef- diesel fuel.
fective and the emission control sys- o Below -5°C (23°F) ... Winter type
tem to malfunction. diesel fuel.
This can also result in increased main-
tenance expense. To avoid accidental Watch the fuel level in the tank very
use of leaded fuel, the large nozzle carefully : If the engine stops through
used with leaded gasoline at service fuel failure, the circuits must be com-
stations can not be inserted into fuel pletely purged to permit restarting.
tank opening of your Hyundai.
NOTE:
B010A02HP
o For some countries, Hyundai ve- ! CAUTION:
hicles are designed to use leaded o Do not let any gasoline or water
For Europe – For the optimal vehicle gasoline. When you are going to
performance, we recommend you to enter the tank. This would make
use leaded gasoline, ask to it necessary to drain it out and to
use unleaded gasoline with an octane Hyundai dealer whether leaded
rating of RON (Research Octane Num- bleed the lines to avoid jamming
gasoline in your vehicle is avail- the injection pump and damag-
ber) 95 /AKI (Anti Knock Index) 91 or able or not.
higher. ing the engine.
o Octane rating of leaded gasoline o In winter, in order to cut down
You may use unleaded gasoline with an is same with unleaded one.
octane rating of RON 91~94/AKI 87~90 incidents due to freezing, paraf-
but it may result in slight performance fin oil may be added to the fuel if
Use Diesel the temperature drops to below
reduction of the vehicle.
Diesel fuel of 52 to 54 cetane is the -10°C. Never use more than 20%
Except Europe – Unleaded gasoline paraffin oil.
correct rating to use in your Hyundai. If
with a Pump Octane Rating of 87 (Re-
two types of diesel fuel are available,
search Octane Number 91) or higher
use summer or winter fuel properly
must be used in Hyundai vehicle.
according to the following temperature
conditions.
1
BREAKING IN YOUR NEW 3
HYUNDAI
B010B01A-AAT B010E01A-AAT B020A01S-GAT
What About Gasohol? Gasolines for Cleaner Air During the First 2,000 Km
Gasohol (a mixture of 90% unleaded To help contribute to cleaner air, (1,200 Miles) (Gasoline Engine)
gasoline and 10% ethanol or grain Hyundai recommends that you use No formal "break-in" procedure is re-
alcohol) may be used in your Hyundai. gasolines treated with detergent addi- quired with your new Hyundai. How-
However, if your engine develops drive tives, which help prevent deposit for- ever, you can contribute to the eco-
ability problems, the use of 100% un- mation in the engine. These gasolines nomical operation and durability of your
leaded gasoline is recommended. Fu- will help the engine run cleaner and Hyundai by observing the following
els with unspecified quantities of alco- enhance performance of the Emission recommendations during the first 2,000
hol, or alcohols other than ethanol, Control System. km (1,200 miles).
should not be used.
o Don't drive faster than 88 km/h (55
B010F01A-AAT mph).
B010D01S-AAT
Operation in Foreign Countries o While driving, keep your engine
Do not Use Methanol
speed (rpm, or revolutions per
Fuels containing methanol (wood al- If you are going to drive your Hyundai minute) between 2,000 rpm and
cohol) should not be used in your in another country, be sure to: 4,000 rpm.
Hyundai. This type of fuel can reduce o Use moderate acceleration. Don't
vehicle performance and damage com- o Observe all regulations regarding start, depress the accelerator pedal
ponents of the fuel system. registration and insurance. fully.
o Determine that acceptable fuel is o For the first 300 km (200 miles), try
available. to avoid hard stops.
! CAUTION: o Don't lug the engine (in other words,
Your Hyundai's New Vehicle Lim- don't drive so slowly in too high a
ited Warranty may not cover dam- gear that the engine "bucks":shift to
age to the fuel system and perfor- a lower gear).
mance problems that are caused by o Whether going fast or slow, vary
the use of methanol or fuels con- your speed from time to time.
taining methanol.
4 KEYS
o Don't let the engine idle longer than o Don't lug the engine (in other words, B030A01A-AAT
3 minutes for a catalytic converter don't drive so slowly in too high a

equipped engine. gear that the engine "bucks": shift to
o Don't tow a trailer during the first a lower gear).
2,000 km (1,200 miles) of opera- o Whether going fast or slow, vary
tion. your speed from time to time.
o Don't let the engine idle longer than
3 minutes at one time.
B020B01FC-GAT
o Don't tow a trailer during the first
During the First 1,000 Km (600 1,000 km (600 miles) of operation.
Miles) (Diesel Engine)
No formal "break-in" procedure is re- B030A01HR
quired with your new Hyundai. How-
For greater convenience, the same
ever, you can contribute to the eco-
key operates all the locks in your
nomical operation and durability of your
Hyundai. However, because the doors
Hyundai by observing the following
can be locked without a key, carrying a
recommendations during the first 1,000
spare key is recommended in case
km (600 miles).
you accidentally lock one key inside
the car.
o While driving, keep your engine
speed (rpm, or revolutions per
minute) within 3,000 rpm.
o While driving, keep under three quar-
ters of maximum speed.
o Use moderate acceleration. Don't
start, depress the accelerator pedal
fully.
o For the first 300 km (200 miles), try
to avoid hard stops.
1
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM 5
B030B01A-AAT B880A01HP-GAT B880B02HP-GAT

Record Your Key Number - For Diesel Engine (2.5 TCI) or Keys
Gasoline Engine Type A
(If Installed)
Light
The immobilizer system is an anti-theft Purple
device, designed to deter automobile
theft. Black
ID key
Master key
B030B01HR B880B01HP
A code number is stamped on the Type B

number plate that came with the keys
to your Hyundai. This key number
plate should not be left with the keys
but kept in a safe place, not in the
vehicle. The key number should also
be recorded in a place where it can be
found in an emergency.
If you need additional keys, or if you ID key
should lose your keys, your authorized Master key
Hyundai dealer can make new keys if
B880B02HP
you can supply the key number.
For greater convenience, your Hyundai
has two types of keys as shown in the
illustration.
6
(1) ID key (3) If you need additional keys or if you B880C01A-GAT
This key must be used first to reg- should lose your keys, your autho- Key Numbers
ister a unique ID code in the ICM. rized Hyundai dealer can make new
This ID code is then recorded onto keys if you can supply the key
the master keys. Both sides of the number and ID key.
key have a Hyundai logo.
NOTE:
(2) Master key If you make your own duplicate key,
This key is for general use. It will you will not be able to cancel the
open all locks on your vehicle. system or start the engine.
One side of the key has the Hyundai
logo and the other side has the "M"
symbol. ! CAUTION: B880C01HP
If your vehicle is equipped with When starting the engine, do not
Theft-alarm system, the master use the key with other immobilizer
keys with the function of transmit- keys around. Otherwise the engine
ter will be provided. (Type B) may not start or may stop soon
after it starts.
Keep each keys separately not to
! CAUTION:
have any malfunction after you re-
ceive your new vehicle.
Don't lose your ID key or forget the
password. Always keep your ID key
in a place where you remember and
record your password. If you don't B880C02HP
have both the password and ID key,
consult your authorized Hyundai The vehicle key number is recorded
dealer. upon a metal tag attached to the keys
when the vehicle is first delivered to
you.
1
7
The key number should be recorded B880D01HP-GAT 3. You may set the remaining number
and kept in a safe place in case the Limp Home Procedures of digits by following the same pro-
need to order further keys arises. New In case the immobilizer system is out cedures 1 and 2.
keys are available from any Hyundai of order, you cannot start the engine 4. If all of four digits have been tried
dealer by quoting the relevant key without the limp home procedures with successfully, from this time, you
number. ignition key. have to start your engine within 30
In the interest of security, the metal tag The following procedure is how to start seconds. If you start your engine
attached to the keys which bears the the engine with the function of the limp after 30 seconds, your engine will
key number should be removed from home. (0, 1, 2, 3 as a sample pass- not start.
the key ring after you receive your new word).
vehicle. In addition, key numbers can- NOTE:
not be provided by Hyundai for secu- NOTE: If the engine dies while driving after
rity reasons. You can get the limp home pass- limp home procedure, you can start
If you need additional keys or if you word when the vehicle is first deliv- your engine within 8 seconds with-
should lose your keys, your authorized ered to you. If you do not have the out limp home procedure again.
Hyundai dealer can make new keys if password, consult your authorized
you can supply the key number and ID Hyundai dealer. After doing the limp home procedure,
key. you have to consult with your autho-
1. To set the password you may turn rized Hyundai dealer as soon as pos-
the ignition key "ON" and then turn sible.
it "OFF" according to the digit num-
bers. For example, turn the ignition
key once for digit number "1", and ! CAUTION:
twice for "2", and so on. However, If you cannot start your engine in
for the digit number "0", you must spite of limp home procedure, have
turn the ignition key for 10 times. your vehicle towed by an autho-
2. Wait for 3~10 seconds. rized Hyundai dealer.
8
B885A01HP-GAT
Type B
- For Diesel Engine (2.9 CRDi)
(If Installed) ! CAUTION:
o The password should be re-
The immobilizer system is an anti-theft corded and kept in a safe place in
device, designed to deter automobile case the need to order further
theft. keys arises.
o If you forget the password, con-
sult your authorized Hyundai
B885B02HP-GAT
dealer.
Keys Master keys o When starting the engine, do not
Type A use the key with other immobi-
B885B02HP
lizer keys around. Otherwise the
All of the locks fitted to the vehicle are engine may not start or may stop
operated by the same key. However, soon after it starts.
Keep each keys separately not to
since it is possible to lock the doors have any malfunction after you
without the use of the key, care should receive your new vehicle.
be exercised to ensure that the key
does not become locked inside the
vehicle by mistake. If your vehicle is
equipped with Theft-alarm system, the
Master keys B885B01HP
master keys with the function of trans-
mitter will be provided (Type B).
NOTE:
If you make your own duplicate key,
you will not be able to cancel the
system or start the engine.
1
9
B885C01O-GAT The key number should be recorded B885D01O-GAT

Key Numbers and kept in a safe place in case the Limp Home Procedures
need to order further keys arises. New
keys are available from any Hyundai
dealer by quoting the relevant key
number.
In the interest of security, the metal tag
attached to the keys which bears the
key number should be removed from
the key ring after you receive your new
vehicle. In addition, key numbers can-
not be provided by Hyundai for secu-
rity reasons.
B885C01HP B880D01HP-1
If you need additional keys or if you
should lose your keys, your authorized In case the immobilizer warning indi-
Hyundai dealer can make new keys. cator blinks for five seconds when the
ignition key is turned to "ON" position,
this indicates that the immobilizer sys-
tem is out of order. And you cannot
start the engine without the limp home
procedures with ignition key.
The following procedure is how to start
the engine with the function of the limp
home. (0, 1, 2, 3 as a sample pass-
word).
B885C02HP
The vehicle key number is recorded

upon a metal tag attached to the keys
when the vehicle is first delivered to
you.
10
NOTE: NOTE: B030C01Y-AAT
You can get the limp home pass- If the engine dies while driving after ILLUMINATED IGNITION
word when the vehicle is first deliv- limp home procedure, you can start SWITCH
ered to you. If you do not have the your engine within 8 seconds with-
password, consult your authorized out limp home procedure again.
Hyundai dealer.
5. If the immobilizer indicator blinks for
1. To set the password you may turn five seconds, you have to try the
the ignition key "ON" and then turn limp home procedure again from
it "OFF" according to the digit num- the beginning.
bers, then the immobilizer indicator
will blink along with the operation of After doing the limp home procedure,
the ignition key. For example, turn you have to consult with your autho-
the ignition key once for digit num- rized Hyundai dealer as soon as pos- B030C01E
ber "1", and twice for "2", and so on. sible.
However, for the digit number "0", Whenever a front door is opened, the
you must turn the ignition key for 10 ignition switch will be illuminated for
times. ! CAUTION:
your convenience, provided the igni-
2. Wait for 3~10 seconds. tion switch is not in the "ON" position.
o If you fail to try the limp home The light will go off approximately 10
3. You may set the remaining number procedure with the sequence of
of digits by following the same pro- seconds after closing the door or when
three times, you have to wait for the ignition switch is turned on.
cedures 1 and 2. about one hour to do the limp
4. If all of four digits have been tried home procedure again.
successfully, turn the ignition key o If you cannot start your engine in
"ON" and check that the immobi- spite of limp home procedure,
lizer indicator illuminates. From this have your vehicle towed by an
time, you have to start your engine authorized Hyundai dealer.
within 30 seconds. If you start your
engine after 30 seconds, your en-
gine will not start.
1
DOOR LOCKS 11
B040A02Y-AAT B040B01A-AAT B040C02Y-DAT

Locking and Unlocking Front Locking from the Outside
Doors with a Key
! WARNING:
o Unlocked doors can be danger-
UNLOCK
ous. Before you drive away (es-
pecially if there are children in
the car), be sure that all the doors
are securely closed and locked LOCK
so that the doors cannot be inad-
vertently opened from the inside.
This helps ensure that the doors
will not be opened accidentally. B040C01HP
Also, when combined with the
HHP2003 The doors can be locked without a key.
proper use of seat belts, locking To lock the doors, first push the inside
the doors helps keep occupants o The door can be locked or unlocked
lock switch to the "LOCK" position so
from being ejected from the car with a key. that the red mark on the switch is not
in case of an accident. o Lock the door by turning the key visible, then close the door.
o Before opening the door, always toward the front of the vehicle and The door will not lock if the key is left in
look for and avoid oncoming traf- unlock it by turning the key toward the ignition switch when the front doors
fic. the rear. are closed. This is normal.
o In case of accident, the door is NOTE:
unlocked automatically (If In- o When locking the door this way,
stalled). be careful not to lock the door
with the ignition key left in the
vehicle.
o To reduce the chance of theft,
always remove the ignition key,
close all windows and lock all
doors when leaving your vehicle
unattended.
12
B040D01S-AAT B040E04A-AAT If you wish to be able to open the door

Locking from the Inside Child-Protector Rear Door Lock from the outside, the outside door
handle will function normally.
LOCK
UNLOCK
B040G02HP-AAT
Central Door Locks
LOCK
UNLOCK
HHP2004 HHP2008
To lock the doors from the inside, Your Hyundai is equipped with a "child-
simply close the door and push the protector" rear door lock assembly.
lock switch to the "LOCK" position. When the lock mechanism is engaged,
When this is done, neither the outside the rear door cannot be opened from
nor the inside door handles can be the inside. Its use is recommended
used. whenever there are small children in B040G01HP
the rear seat. The central door locking switch is lo-

NOTE: cated on the driver's armrest. It is
When the door is locked, the red To engage the child-protector feature operated by depressing the door lock
mark on the switch is not visible. so that the door cannot be opened switch.
from the inside, move the child-protec-
tor lever to the " " position and close
the door. Move the lever to the " "
position when normal door operation is
desired.
1
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM 13
NOTE: B070A01A-AAT B070B01O-AAT
o When pushing the front portion (If Installed) Armed Stage

of the driver's door lock switch, This system is designed to provide Type A
all vehicle doors will lock. If any protection from unauthorized entry into
door is open when the switch is the car. This system is operated in
depressed, the door will remain three stages: the first is the "Armed"
locked when closed. stage, the second is the "Alarm" stage,
o When pushing the rear portion of and the third is the "Disarmed" stage.
the switch, all vehicle doors will If triggered, the system provides an
unlock. audible alarm with blinking of the turn
o The central door locking is oper- signal lights.
ated by turning the key toward UNLOCK
the front or rear of the vehicle. LOCK HHP2002
o If the door is locked/unlocked mul-
tiple times in rapid succession Type B
with either the vehicle key or door
lock switch, the system may stop
operating temporarily in order to
protect the circuit and prevent
damage to system components.
LOCK
UNLOCK B070B02HP
Park the car and stop the engine. Arm

the system as described below.
14
1) Remove the ignition key from the B070C01HP-GAT

Alarm Stage
ignition switch.
2) Make sure that the engine hood and
! CAUTION:
tail gate are closed and latched. Avoid trying to start the engine while
3) Lock the doors using the transmitter the system is armed.
of the keyless entry system.
After completion of the steps above,

B070D01HP-AAT
the turn signal lights will blink once to
indicate that the system is armed.
Disarmed Stage
Type A Type B
NOTE:
1) If any door, tail gate or engine B070C01HP
hood remains open, the system
will not be armed. The alarm will be activated if any of the
2) If this happens, rearm the system following occurs while the car is parked
as previously described. and the system is armed.
1) A front or rear door is opened with-

out using the transmitter.
! CAUTION:
2) The tail gate is opened without us-
ing the transmitter. B070D01HP
Do not arm the system until all 3) The engine hood is opened. The system will be disarmed when the
passengers have left the car. If the driver's or passenger's door is un-
system is armed while a The siren will sound and the turn signal locked by depressing the "UNLOCK"
passenger(s) remains in the car, lights will blink continuouly for 27 sec- button on the transmitter.
the alarm may be activated when onds (Type B/ Type A : This will repeat
the remaining passenger(s) leaves 3 times). To turn off the system, unlock
the car. the door or tail gate with the transmit-
ter.
1
15
After completion of the step above, the B070F02A-GAT - Other vehicles or objects may be
turn signal lights will blink twice to Keyless Entry System blocking the signal.
indicate that the system is disarmed. (If Installed) - The weather is extremely cold.
- The transmitter is close to a radio
Locking doors
NOTE: transmitter such as a radio station
If any door, tail gate or engine hood 1. Close all doors. or an airport which can interfere
is not opened within 30 seconds, 2. Push the "LOCK" button on the trans- with normal operation of the trans-
the system will be rearmed. mitter. mitter.
3. At the same time all doors lock, the When the transmitter does not work
turn signal lights will blink once to correctly, open and close the door
indicate that the system is armed. with the ignition key. If you have a
! CAUTION: problem with the transmitter, con-
Only the transmitter can disarm the Unlocking doors tact an authorized Hyundai Dealer.
armed stage. If the transmitter does 1. Push the "UNLOCK" button on the
not disarm the system, it is neces- transmitter.
NOTE:
sary to take the following steps; 2. At the same time all doors unlock, Keep the transmitter away from wa-
the turn signal lights will blink twice ter or any liquid. If the keyless entry
1. Unlock the door with the key, to indicate that the system is dis- system is inoperative due to expo-
which will cause the alarm to be armed. sure to water or liquids, it will not be
activated. covered by your manufacturer ve-
2. Insert the key in the ignition key hicle warranty.
NOTE:
cylinder and turn the ignition key
The transmitter will not work if any of
to "ON" position.
following occur:
3. Wait for 30 seconds.
- The ignition key is in ignition
switch.
After completing the steps above,
- You exceed the operating distance
the system will be disarmed.
limit (10 m).
- The battery in the transmitter is
weak.
16
B070E02HP-GAT Type B:
Replacing the battery
When the transmitter's battery begins Case
to get weak, it may take several pushes
on the button to lock or unlock the
doors, and the LED will not light. Re-
place the battery as soon as possible.
Battery type : CR2032(Type A) Transmitter

or CR1616 (Type B) Battery Case
Replacement instructions: MSO-0048-2
Type A: 2. Remove the old battery from the HMXOM033-2

case and note the polarity. Make
1. Carefully separate the case with a
sure the polarity of the new battery
is the same(+side facing down), then phillips screwdriver.
insert it in the transmitter.
3. Installation is the reverse order of
disassembly.
Screwdriver
MSO-0048-1
1. Carefully separate the case with a

blade screwdriver as shown in the
illustration.
1
POWER WINDOWS 17
B060A03L-AAT
Hole
Open Close
(1)
(2)
Battery Battery Cover
HMXOM033-3 B060A02HP
B060A01HP
2. Take off the battery cover after sepa- In order to prevent operation of the
The power windows operate when the passanger front and rear windows, a
rating the transmitter.
ignition key is in the "ON" position. The window lock switch(2) is provided on
3. Remove the old battery from the
main switches are located on the the armrest of the driver's door. To
transmitter with a blade screwdriver
driver's armrest and control the front disable the power windows, press the
inserted in the hole and note the
and rear windows on both sides of the window lock switch. To revert to nor-
polarity. Make sure the polarity of
vehicle. The windows may be opened mal operation, press the window lock
the new battery is the same(+side
by depressing the appropriate window switch a second time.
facing up), then insert it in the trans-
switch and closed by pulling up the
mitter.
switch. To open the window on the
driver's side, press the switch(1) half-
disassembly.
way down. The window moves as long
as the switch is operated. To fully open
the driver's window automatically, press
the switch fully down. In automatic
operation, the window will fully open
even if you let go of the switch. To stop
at the desired opening, pull up and
release the switch.
18 SEATS
NOTE: B080A01A-AAT
ADJUSTABLE FRONT SEATS
The power windows can be oper-
ated for 30 seconds after the igni-
! WARNING:
tion key is turned to the "ACC" or 1) Be careful that someone's head, ! WARNING:
"LOCK" positions, or removed from hands and body are not trapped
the ignition switch. by a closing window. Never attempt to adjust the seat
If the front doors are opened during 2) Never try to operate the main while the vehicle is moving. This
this 30 second period, the power switch on the driver's door and could result in loss of control or an
windows can no longer be oper- the individual door window accident which may cause death,
ated without the ignition key turned switch in opposing directions at serious injury, or property damage.
to the "ON" position. the same time. If this is done, the
window will stop and cannot be
B080B02A-AAT
opened or closed.
3) Do not leave children alone in the Adjusting Seat Forward and
car. Always remove the ignition Rearward
Close key for their safety.
Open
HHP2013
HHP2026
To move the seat toward the front or

rear, pull the lock release lever up-
ward.
1
19
This will release the seat on its track To recline the seatback, lean forward to B080D02JM-GAT
so you can move it forward or rearward take your weight off it, then pull up on Adjustable Headrests
to the desired position. When you find the recliner control lever at the outside
the position you want, release the edge of the seat. Now lean back until
lever and slide the seat forward or the desired seatback angle is achieved.
rearward on its track until it locks into To lock the seatback into position,
the desired position and cannot be release the recliner control lever.
moved further.
! WARNING:
! WARNING:
To ensure the seat is locked se- To minimize risk of severe injury in Lock knob
curely, attempt to move the seat the event of a collision or a sudden B080D01HP
forward or rearward without using stop, both the driver and passen-
ger seatbacks should always be in Headrests are designed to help reduce
the lock release lever.
an upright position while the ve- the risk of neck injuries.
hicle is in motion. The protection To raise the headrest, pull it up. To
B080C01A-AAT provided by the seat belts and lower it, push it down while pressing
Adjusting Seatback Angle airbags in a frontal collision may be the lock knob. To remove the head-
reduced significantly when the rest, raise it as far as it can go then
seatbacks are reclined. There is press the lock knob while pulling up-
greater risk that the driver and pas- ward.
senger will slide under the seat belt
which may result in serious injury if
a crash occurs when the seatbacks
are reclined.
The seat belt cannot provide full
protection to an occupant if the
seat back is reclined.
HHP2027
20
B080E02A-AAT
while the vehicle is in motion. Lumbar Support Control
! WARNING: (Driver's seat only) (If Installed)
B081D01LZ-AAT
Tilting Headrest Forward and
Rearward (If Installed) 1
B080D01JM HHP2032
o For maximum effectiveness in case To adjust the lumbar support, turn the
of an accident the headrest should handle on the inboard side of the seat.
be adjusted so the middle of the To increase the amount of lumbar sup-
headrest is at the same height as port, pull the lever forward. To de-
the top of the occupant's eyes. For HHP2034 crease it, push the lever toward the
this reason, the use of a cushion
that holds the body away from the The headrest may be tilted forward to rear.
seatback should not be recom- three different positions by pulling the
mended. headrest forward. To adjust the head- 1. Minimum support
o Do not operate vehicle with the rest rearward, pull it fully forward to the 2. Maximum support
headrests removed as injury to farthest position and release it. Adjust
the occupants may occur in the the headrest so that it properly sup-
event of an accident. Headrests ports the head and neck.
may provide protection against
neck injuries when properly ad-
justed.
o Do not adjust the headrest hejght
1
21
B080F01S-AAT B090A02Y-AAT B090B01L-AAT

Seat Cushion Height Adjustment POWER DRIVER'S SEAT Adjusting Seat Forward and
(Driver's Seat Only) (If Installed) (If Installed) Rearward
The driver's seat can be adjusted ap-
propriately by using the control knob
on the left side of the seat. Before 1
driving, adjust the seat to the proper
position so as to easily control the 2
steering wheel, pedals and switches
on the instrument panel.
! CAUTION:
HHP2028 HHP2029
Do not operate two knobs at the
To raise or lower the front part of the same time. Pull the control knob forward or back-
seat cushion, turn the front knob forward to move the seat forward or back-
ward or rearward. To raise or lower the ward to the desired position. Release
rear part of the seat cushion, turn the the knob and the seat will lock at that
rear knob forward or rearward. ! WARNING: position.
o Never attempt to adjust the seat
while the vehicle is moving. This 1. Reclining Control Knob
could result in loss of control or 2. Sliding and Height Adjusting Con-
an accident causing death, seri- trol Knob
ous injury, or property damage.
o Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the airbag.
22
B090C01Y-AAT B090D01Y-AAT
Seat Cushion Height Adjustment Adjusting Seatback Angle
! WARNING:
To minimize the risk of personal
injury in the event of a collision or
a sudden stop, both the driver's
and passenger's seatbacks should
remain in an upright position while
the car is in motion. The protection
provided by the seat belts and
airbags may be reduced signifi-
cantly when the seatbacks are re-
HHP2031
clined. There is a greater risk that
HHP2030
the seat occupants will slide under
Move the front portion of the control Rotate the upper portion of the control the belt resulting in serious injury
knob up or down to raise or lower the knob forward or backward to recline if a crash occurs when the seatbacks
front part of the seat cushion. Move the the seatback to the desired position. are reclined. The seat belt cannot
rear portion of the control knob up or Release the control knob and then the provide full protection to an occu-
down to raise or lower the rear part of seatback will lock in that position. pant if the seatback is reclined.
the seat cushion.
1
23
B080G01O-AAT B100A02HP-GAT
UNDER TRAY SEAT WARMER (If Installed)
! CAUTION:
o The seat warmer will not operate
if ambient temperature is higher
than 31.5°C (88.7°F).
o If the seat warmer doesn't work
when ambient temperature is
lower than 24.5°C (76.1°F), it must
be checked by authorized dealer.
HHP2037 B100A01HP
The tray is located under the front The seat warmer is provided to warm
passenger seat. It is opend by pulling the front seats during cold weather.
forward. With the ignition key in the "ON" posi-
tion, push either of the switches to
warm the driver's seat or the
! WARNING: passenger's seat.
To avoid the possibility of injury in During mild weather or under condi-
case of an accident or a sudden tions where the operation of the seat
stop, the tray should be kept closed warmer is not needed, keep the
when the car is in motion. switches in the "OFF" position.
24
B090A03HP-GAT B090C02HP-GAT
SECOND SEAT Adjusting Seatback Angle
Adjustable Headrests ! WARNING:
(If Installed) o For maximum effectiveness in
case of an accident the headrest
should be adjusted so the middle
of the headrest is at the same
height as the top of the
occupant's eyes. For this rea-
son, the use of a cushion that
holds the body away from the
seatback should not be recom- Seatback
mended.
o Do not operate vehicle with the folding lever
HHP2039
headrests removed as injury to
Lock Knob the occupants may occur in the To recline the seatback, push the
B090A01HP event of an accident. Headrests seatback folding lever toward the head-
Headrests are designed to help re- may provide protection against rest, and release it after the desired
duce the risk of neck injuries. neck injuries when properly ad- seatback angle is achieved.
To raise the headrest, pull it up. To justed. When you recline the seatback to de-
lower it, push it down while pressing o Do not adjust the headrest hejght sired position, always be sure it has
the lock knob. while the vehicle is in motion. locked into position.
To remove the headrest, raise it as far
as it can go then press the lock knob
while pulling upward.
1
25
B090B02HP-DAT
NOTE:
Folding Rear Seatback and Seat
! WARNING: Cushion
Before folding the seat, fit the seat
belt webbing in the clip and put the
To minimize the risk of personal For greater convenience, the entire seat belt buckle between the
injury in the event of a collision or seatback and seat cushion may be seatback and the seat cushion.
a sudden stop, both the driver's folded down and up.
and passenger's seatbacks should 1. Lower the headrest completely while
remain in an upright position while pressing the lock knob. (If Installed)
provided by the seat belts and
clined. There is a greater risk that
the seat occupants will slide under
the belt resulting in serious injury
if a crash occurs when the seatbacks
are reclined. The seat belt cannot
provide full protection to an occu- HHP2057 (1)
pant if the seatback is reclined.
HHP2040
2. To fold down the seatback , first

push and hold the seatback folding
lever(1) inward, and then push down
the seatback.
HHP2041
26
! WARNING:
When folding down or returning
the seatback, always hold the
seatback. Otherwise, the seatback (3)
could move suddenly and result in
unexpected injury.
HHP2043 HHP2043-1
4. To secure the seat, hook the secur- NOTE:

ing strap(3) under the seat cushion o Before lowering the seat cush-
to the headrest stay of front driver ion when you return the seat, roll
and passenger seat. the securing strap and put it in
5. To return the seatback and seat the pocket.
cushion to its normal position, re- o When you return the seatback to
verse the above procedure. its upright position, always be
(2)
sure it is locked into position by
HHP2042 pulling and pushing on the top
of seatback.
3. Pull the seat cushion release le-
ver(2) upward, and then fold up the
seat cushion.
1
27
B095A03HP-GAT
o When you return the rear THIRD SEAT(For 7 Passengers)
! WARNING: seatback to its upright position Adjusting Seatback Angle
o The purpose of the fold-down after being folded down, be care-
rear seatback and the fold-up rear ful not to damage the seat belt
seat cushion is to allow you to webbing or buckle. In addition,
carry more objects than could be do not allow the seat belt web-
accommodated. Never allow pas- bing or buckle to get caught or
sengers to sit on the cargo area pinched in the rear seat.
while the car is moving. This is o Do not allow passengers to fold
not a proper seating position and down and up the seatback and
no seat belts are available for use seat cushion while the car is
when the seatback is folded moving.
down.
HHP2049
This could result in serious in-
jury or death in case of an acci- To recline the seatback, pull the
dent or a sudden stop. Objects seatback recliner control lever back-
should not extend higher than wards, and release it after the desired
the top of the front seatbacks. seatback angle is achieved.
This could allow cargo to slide When you recline the seatback to de-
forward and cause injury or dam- sired position, always be sure it has
age during sudden stops. locked into position.
28
B095B04HP-GAT
Folding Rear Seatback and Seat
! WARNING: Cushion
To minimize the risk of personal 1. Lower the headrest completely while
injury in the event of a collision or pressing the lock knob (If Installed).
a sudden stop, both the driver's (2)
and passenger's seatbacks should
remain in an upright position while
provided by the seat belts and (1)
HHP2051
clined. There is a greater risk that 3. Pull the seat cushion release knob(2)
the seat occupants will slide under beside the seat cushion, and fold
the belt resulting in serious injury the seat cushion sideways.
if a crash occurs when the seatbacks
are reclined. The seat belt cannot
HHP2050
provide full protection to an occu-
pant if the seatback is reclined. 2. To fold down the seatback, pull the
seatback recliner control lever(1),
and then push down the seatback.
! WARNING:
When folding down or returning
the seatback, always hold the
seatback. Otherwise, the seatback
could move suddenly and result in
unexpected injury.
1
29
5. Fix the seat belt buckle in the groove

(3) This could result in serious in-
not to damage it.
jury or death in case of an acci-
6. To return the seatback and seat
dent or a sudden stop. Objects
cushion to its normal position, re-
should not extend higher than
verse the above procedure.
the top of the front seatbacks.
(4) This could allow cargo to slide
NOTE: forward and cause injury or dam-
When you return the seat cushion age during sudden stops.
to its normal position, always lower o When you return the rear
the leg of the third seat to lock the seatback to its upright position
HHP2053
seat into position. after being folded down, be care-
ful not to damage the seat belt
4. To secure the seat, hook the secur-
webbing or buckle. In addition,
ing strap(3) under the seat cushion
to the assist handle and fold the leg ! WARNING:
do not allow the seat belt web-
bing or buckle to get caught or
of the third seat(4). o The purpose of the fold-down pinched in the rear seat.
rear seatback and the fold-up rear o Do not allow passengers to fold
seat cushion is to allow you to down and up the seatback and
carry more objects than could be seat cushion while the car is
accommodated. Never allow pas- moving.
sengers to sit on the cargo area
while the car is moving. This is
not a proper seating position and
no seat belts are available for use
when the seatback is folded
down.
HHP2054
30
B095C01HP-GAT
To get in and out of the third seat
The second seat should be folded up
to get in and out of the third seat.
(2) (4)
1. Lower the headrest completely while
pressing the lock knob.(If Installed)
(3)
B095C01HP B095C02HP
3. To get in the third seat, pull the 4. To secure the seat, hook the secur-
handle for folding the seat cushion ing strap (4) under the seat cushion
(2) beside the seat cushion, then to the headrest stay of front driver
(1) fold up the seat cushion. and passenger seat.
To get out of the third seat, pull the
seat cushion release lever (3) up- After doing above procedure, passen-
HHP2045 ward and fold up the seat cushion. gers can get in or get out of the third
seat.
2. To fold down the seatback , first
push and hold the seatback folding
lever (1) inward, and then push down
the seatback. ! WARNING:
Do not allow passengers to fold
down and up the seatback and seat
cushion while the car is moving.
1
SEAT BELTS 31
B140A01B-GAT B150A02A-GAT
NOTE:
REAR SEAT WARNING SEAT BELT PRECAUTIONS Small children are best protected in
All occupants of the vehicle should an accident when properly re-
wear their seat belts at all times. In- strained by a child restraint sys-
deed, your province's laws may re- tem.
quire that some or all occupants of the
vehicle use seat belts.
B150C02A-AAT
The possibility of injury or the severity Larger Children
of injury in an accident will be de-
creased if this elementary safety pre- Children who are too large for child
caution is observed. In addition, follow restraint systems should always oc-
the other instructions provided in this cupy the rear seat and use the avail-
B140A01HP section. able lap/shoulder belts. The lap por-
tion should be fastened snug on the
For the safety of all passengers, lug- hips and as low as possible. Check
gage or other cargo should not be piled belt fit periodically. A child's squirming
higher than the top of the seatback. B150B01Y-GAT
could put the belt out of position. Chil-
Infant or Small Child dren are afforded the most safety in
Some countries require the use of the event of an accident when they are
child restraint systems for infants and restrained by a proper restraint sys-
small children. Whether this is required tem in the rear seat. If a larger child
by law or not, it is strongly recom- (over age 13) must be seated in the
mended that a child restraint seat or front seat, the child should be securely
infant restraint system be used for restrained by the available lap/shoul-
infants or small children weighing less der belt and the seat should be placed
than 18 kilograms (40 pounds). in the rearmost position. Children un-
der the age of 13 should be restrained
32
securely in the rear seat. NEVER place B150F01A-AAT

One Person Per Belt
a child under the age of 13 in the front
seat. NEVER place a rear facing child
! WARNING:
Two people (including children) should
seat in the front seat of a vehicle. never attempt to use a single seat belt. Sitting in a reclined position or ly-
This could increase the severity of ing down when your vehicle is in
injuries in case of an accident. motion can be dangerous. Even if
B150D01A-AAT you buckle up, your seat belts can't
Pregnant Women do their job when you're reclined.
The shoulder belt can't do its job
The use of a seat belt is recommended because it won't be against your
B150G01A-AAT
for pregnant women to lessen the body. Instead, it will be in front of
Do Not Lie Down
chance of injury in an accident. When you. In a crash you could go into it
a seat belt is used, the lap belt portion To reduce the chance of injuries in the with great force, receiving serious
should be placed as low and snugly as event of an accident and to achieve neck or other injuries.
possible on the hips, not across the maximum effectiveness of the restraint The lap belt can't do its job either. In
abdomen. For specific recommenda- system, all passengers should be sit- a crash the belt could go up over
tions, consult a physician. ting up and the front seats should be in your abdomen. The belt forces
an upright position when the car is would be applied there, not at your
moving. A seat belt cannot operate strong pelvic bones.
properly if the person is lying down in This could cause serious internal
B150E01A-AAT the rear seat or if the front seat is in a injuries.
Injured Person reclined position. For proper protection when the ve-
A seat belt should be used when an hicle is in motion, have the seatback
injured person is being transported. upright. Then sit well back in the
When this is necessary, you should seat and wear your seat belt prop-
consult a physician for recommenda- erly. See page 1-34.
tions.
1
33
B160A01A-AAT B160C01A-AAT B170A04A-AAT

CARE OF SEAT BELTS Keep Belts Clean and Dry HEIGHT ADJUSTABLE FRONT
Seat belt systems should never be Seat belts should be kept clean and SEAT SHOULDER BELT
disassembled or modified. In addition, dry. If belts become dirty, they can be (If Installed)
care should be taken to assure that cleaned by using a mild soap solution
seat belts and belt hardware are not and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong
damaged by seat hinges, doors or detergents or abrasives should not be
other abuse. used because they may damage and
weaken the fabric.
! WARNING: B160D01A-AAT
When you return the rear seatback When to Replace Seat Belts
to its upright position after the rear
seatback was folded down, be care- Entire in-use seat belt assembly or
ful not to damage the seat belt web- assemblies should be replaced if the B170A01HP
bing or buckle. Be sure that the vehicle has been involved in an acci-
You can adjust the height of the shoul-
webbing or buckle does not get dent. This should be done even if no
der belt anchor to one of the 4 positions
caught or pinched in the rear seat. damage is visible. Additional ques-
for maximum comfort and safety.
tions concerning seat belt operation
If the height of the adjusting seat belt is
should be directed to your Hyundai
too near your neck, you will not be
Dealer.
getting the most effective protection.
B160B01A-AAT The shoulder portion should be ad-
Periodic Inspection justed so that it lies across your chest
It is recommended that all seat belts and midway over your shoulder near-
be inspected periodically for wear or est the door and not your neck.
damage of any kind. Parts of the sys- To adjust the height of the seat belt
tem that are damaged should be re- anchor, lower or raise the height ad-
placed as soon as possible. juster into an appropriate position. To
raise the height adjuster, pull it up. To
34
lower it, push it down while pressing B180A02A-GAT will extend and let you move around. If
the height adjuster button. SEAT BELTS-Driver's and there is a sudden stop or impact, how-
Release the button to lock the anchor Passenger's 3-Point System with ever, the belt will lock into position. It
into position. Try sliding the height Webbing Clamp Locking Retrac- will also lock if you try to lean forward
adjuster to make sure that it has locked tor (If Installed) too quickly.
into the position. To Fasten Your Belt
B180A02Y-GAT
! WARNING:
SEAT BELTS-3-Point System
with Emergency Locking Retrac-
o The height adjuster must be in
the locked position when the tor (If Installed)
vehicle is moving. To Fasten Your Belt
o Misadjustment of shoulder belt
height could reduce the effective-
ness of the seat belt in a crash.
B180A01L
To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of

the retractor and insert the metal tab
into the buckle. There will be an au-
dible "click" when the tab locks into the
buckle.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to B180A01L
the proper length only after the lap belt

is adjusted manually so that it fits
snugly around your hips. If you lean
forward in a slow, easy motion, the belt
1
35
To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of B200A01S-GAT B210A01A-AAT
the retractor and insert the metal tab Adjusting Your Seat Belt To Release the Seat Belt
into the buckle. There will be an au-
dible "click" when the tab locks into the
buckle.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to
the proper length only after the lap belt
is adjusted manually so that it fits
snugly around your hips. If you lean
forward in a slow, easy motion, the belt
will extend and let you move around. If
there is a sudden stop or impact, how-
ever, the belt will lock into position. It
B200A01L B210A01L
will also lock if you try to lean forward
too quickly. Check to make sure that You should place the belt as low as The seat belt is released by pressing
the belt is properly locked and that the possible on your hips, not on your the release button in the locking buckle.
belt is not twisted. waist. If the belt is located too high on When it is released, the belt should
your body, you could slide under it in automatically draw back into the re-
case of accident or a sudden stop. tractor.
This could result of death, serious If this does not happen, check the belt
injury or property damage. Both arms to be sure it is not twisted, then try
should not be under or over the belt. again.
Rather, one should be over and the
other under, as shown in the illustra-
tion.
Never wear the seat belt under the arm
nearest the door.
36
B220A01A-AAT B220B01A-AAT B220C01A-AAT

SEAT BELTS (2-Point Static Adjusting Your Seat Belt To Release the Seat Belt
Type) (Rear Seat Center)
(If Installed)
To Fasten Your Seat Belt
Too
high
Shorten Correct
HTB226
Center HHP2056
With a 2-point static type seat belt, the When you want to release the seat
length must be adjusted manually so it belt, press the button in the locking
HTB225
fits snugly around your body. Fasten buckle.
the belt and pull on the loose end to
To fasten a 2-point static type belt, tighten. The belt should be placed as
insert the metal tab into the locking low as possible on your hips, not on ! WARNING:
buckle. There will be an audible "click" your waist. If the belt is too high, it
when the tab locks into the buckle. The center lap belt latching mecha-
could increase the possibility of your nism is different from those for the
Check to make sure the belt is properly being injured in an accident.
locked and that the belt is not twisted. rear seat shoulder belts. When fas-
tening the rear seat shoulder belts
or the center lap belt, make sure
they are inserted into the correct
buckles to obtain maximum protec-
tion from the seat belt system and
assure proper operation.
1
37
B220D02HP-GAT
SEAT BELTS - Center Rear Seat
3-Point System With Emergency
Locking Retractor (If Installed)
(c)
(d)
(c)
(a) B220D02HP B220A02Y-D
(d) 3. After confirming that (a) and (b) are There will be an audible "click" when
(b) latched, pull the seat belt out of the the tab locks in the buckle. The seat
retractor and insert the metal tab (c) belt automatically adjusts to the proper
B220D01HP
into the buckle (d). length only after the lap belt is adjusted
1. Pull the seat belt out of the roof manually so that it fits snugly around
panel. your hips. If you lean forward in a slow,
2. Before fastening the rear seat cen- easy motion, the belt will extend and
ter belt, confirm the metal tab (a) let you move around. If there is a
and buckle (b) are latched together. sudden stop or impact, the belt will lock
into position. It will also lock if you try to
lean forward too quickly.
38
! WARNING:
o When using the rear seat center
belt, you must lock all metal tabs
and buckles. If any metal tab or
buckle is not locked, it will in-
crease the chance of injury in the (a)
event of collision.
o Never unlock the metal tab (a)
and the buckle (b) with the fol- (b)
lowing exceptions. B220D03HP B220D04HP
(1) In case of folding rear
seatbacks down. o To disconnect the metal tab (a) o In case of unlocking metal tab (a)
(2) If transporting an object on from the buckle (b), insert a sharp- and the buckle (b), place metal
the rear seat may cause dam- ended tool into the groove lo- (a) in the seat belt clip not to
age to the rear seat center cated on the buckle (b). make noise while driving.
belt.
o Lock the metal tab (a) and the
buckle (b) immediately after fold-
ing rear seatbacks up.
1
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM 39
B220C02A-GAT B230A03P-GAT
To Release the Seat Belt (If Installed)
! WARNING:
Children riding in the car should sit in
the rear seat and must always be o A child restraint system must be
properly restrained to minimize the placed in the rear seat. Never
risk of injury in an accident, sudden install a child or infant seat on
stop or sudden maneuver. According the front passenger's seat.
to accident statistics, children are safer Should an accident occur and
when properly restrained in the rear cause the passenger's side airbag
seats than in the front seat. Larger to deploy, it could severely in-
children not in a child restraint should jure or kill an infant or child seated
use one of the seat belts provided. in an infant or child seat. Thus,
You are required by law to use safety only use a child restraint in the
B220C01HP-E
restraints for children. If small children rear seat of your vehicle.
When you want to release the seat o Since a safety belt or child re-
ride in your vehicle you must put them
belt, press the button in the locking straint system can become very
in a child restraint system (safety seat).
buckle. hot if it is left in a closed vehicle,
Children could be injured or killed in a
crash if their restraints are not properly be sure to check the seat cover
! WARNING:
secured. For small children and ba- and buckles before placing a
child there.
bies, a child seat or infant seat must be
When fastening the outboard seat used. Before buying a particular child o When the child restraint system
belts or the center seat belt, make restraint system, make sure it fits your is not in use, fasten it with a
sure they are inserted into the cor- car and seat belts, and fits your child. safety belt so that it will not be
rect buckles to obtain maximum Follow all the instructions provided by thrown forward in the case of a
protection from the seat belt sys- the manufacturer when installing the sudden stop or an accident.
tem and assure proper operation. child restraint system.
40
B230F01A-GAT
o Children who are too large to be o Never use an infant carrier or Installation on Center Rear Seat
in a child restraint should sit in child safety seat that "hooks"
2-Point static type
the rear seat and be restrained over a seatback; it may not pro-
with the available lap/shoulder vide adequate security in an ac-
belts. Never allow children to ride cident.
in the front passenger seat. o Never allow a child to be held in
o Always make sure that the shoul- a person's arms while they are in
der belt portion of the outboard a moving vehicle, as this could
lap/shoulder belt is positioned result in serious injury to the
midway over the shoulder, never child in the event of an accident
across the neck or behind the or a sudden stop. Holding a child
back. Moving the child closer to in a moving vehicle does not
the center of the vehicle may help provide the child with any means B230F01HP
provide a good shoulder belt fit. of protection during an accident,
The lap belt portion of the lap/ even if the person holding the 3-Point type
shoulder belt or the center seat child is wearing a seat belt.
lap belt must always be posi- o If the child restraint seat is not
tioned as low as possible on the anchored properly, the risk of a
child's hips and as snug as pos- child being seriously injured or
sible. killed in a collision greatly in-
o If the seat belt will not properly fit creases.
the child, Hyundai recommends
the use of an approved booster
seat in the rear seat in order to
raise the child's seating height B230F02HP
so that the seat belt will properly

fit the child.
o Never allow a child to stand up or
kneel on the seat.
1
41
Use the center seat belt for the rear to B230G01A-GAT If you need to tighten the belt, pull
secure the child restraint system as Installation on the Outboard Rear more webbing toward the retractor.
illustrated. After installation of the child Seats When you unbuckle the seat belt and
restraint system, rock the child seat allow it to retract, the retractor will
back and forth, and side to side to automatically revert back to its normal
ensure that it is properly secured by seated passenger emergency locking
the seat belt. usage condition.
If the child seat moves, readjust the
length of the seat belt. Then, if NOTE:
equipped, insert the child restraint o Before installing the child re-
tether strap hook into the child restraint system, read the instruc-
straint hook holder and tighten to se- tions supplied by the child re-
cure the seat. Always refer to the child straint system manufacturer.
restraint system manufacturer's rec- o If the seat belt does not operate
B230G01HP
ommendation before installing the child as described, have the system
restraint system in your vehicle. To install a child restraint system on checked immediately by your
the outboard rear seats, extend the authorized Hyundai dealer.
shoulder/lap belt from its retractor.
Buckle the seat belt and allow the seat
belt to take up any slack. Make sure ! WARNING:
that the lap portion of the belt is tight
around the child restraint system and Do not install any child restraint
the shoulder portion of the belt is posi- system in the front passenger seat.
tioned so that it cannot interfere with Should an accident occur and cause
the child's head or neck. After installa- the passenger's side airbag to de-
tion of the child restraint system, try to ploy, it could severely injure or kill
move it in all directions to be sure the an infant or child seated in an infant
child restraint system is securely in- or child seat. Therefore, only use a
stalled. child restraint system in the rear
seat of your vehicle.
42
B230H03HP-GAT U : Suitable for "universal" category B230B02A-AAT

Child Seat Restraint Suitability restraints approved for use in this Using a Child Restraint System
For Seat Position Using The Seat mass group With "Tether Anchorage" Sys-
Belt UF : Suitable for forward-facing "uni- tem
versal" category restraints ap-
Use child safety seats that have been
proved for use in this mass group Holder Bolt
officially approved and are appropriate (5/16"-30 mm)
L1 : Suitable for "Römer ISOFIX GR1"
for your children.
approved for use in this mass
When using the child safety seats, refer
group
to the following table. Conical Spring Washer
(Approval No: E1 R44-03301133)
Seating Position X : Seat position not suitable for chil-
Child Restraint Hook
Age Group Front Rear Rear
dren in this mass group
Holder
Passenger Outboard Center
0 : Up to 10 kg Retainer Washer
X U U
(0 ~ 9 months) B230B01HP
0+ : Up to 13 kg
X U U For small children and babies, the use
(0 ~ 2 years)
of a child seat or infant seat is required.
I : 9kg to 18kg
This child seat or infant seat should be
(9 months ~ 4 X U, L1 U of appropriate size for the child and
years) should be installed in accordance with
II & III : 15kg to the manufacturer's instructions. It is
36kg (4 ~ 12 X UF UF further required that the seat be placed
years) in the vehicle's rear seat since this can
make an important contribution to
safety. Your vehicle is provided with
three child restraint hook holders for
installing the child seat or infant seat.
1
43
B230C02HP-GAT the headrest and between the head- B230D04E-GAT

Securing a Child Restraint Sys- rest posts, otherwise route the tether Securing a Child Restraint Sys-
tem with "Tether Anchorage" strap over the top of the seatback. tem with "ISOFIX" System and
System "Tether Anchorage" System
Three child restraint hook holders are
located on the floor behind the second
seat.
Install the child restraint seat accord-
ing to the instructions provided as fol-
lowing.
Tether Anchor Cover Child Restraint
Hook Holder Child
Restraint
Hook
Holders B230D01HP
ISOFIX is a standardized method of

fitting child seats that eliminates the
need to use the standard adult seat
belt to secure the seat in the vehicle.
This enables a much more secure and
Hole B230C01HP positive location with the added benefit
Tether Strap
of easier and quicker installation.
1. Open the tether anchor cover on the Hook
floor behind the second seat with
the key inserted in the hole.
Front of Vehicle B230C02HP
2. Route the child restraint seat strap
over the seatback. 3. Connect the tether strap hook to the
For vehicles with adjustable head- child restraint hook holder and
rests, route the tether strap under tighten to secure the seat.
44
An ISOFIX-seat can only be installed if NOTE:

it has vehicle-specific approval in ac- An ISOFIX-child-seat can only be
ISOFIX Anchor
cordance with the requirements of ISOFIX Anchor Position Indicator installed if the seat has a vehicle-
ECE-R44. For your Hyundai, the specific approval according to ECE-
Hyundai ISOFIX GR1 / Hyundai Duo / R44. Before using the ISOFIX-child-
Römer ISOFIX GR1 and the Römer seat, which was bought for another
Duo ISOFIX / Britax Duo ISOFIX is car, ask your Hyundai-dealer
approved according to the requirement whether this seat-type is approved
ECE-R44. This seat has been tested and recommended for your
extensively by Hyundai and is recom- Hyundai.
mended for your Hyundai.
B230D02HP
To secure the child restraint seat
NOTE: On each side of the rear seat, between
At present, this seat is the only one the cushion and backrest, are located
complying with that provision. In a pair of ISOFIX anchorage points
case that other manufacturers will together with a top tether mounting on
furnish proof of a respective certifi- the luggage compartment. During the
cation, Hyundai is going to evalu- installing, the seat has to be engaged
ate this seat carefully and will give at the anchorage-points in a way you
a recommendation provided that can hear it clicking (check by pulling!)
seat complies to the law. Please ask and has to be fixed with the Top Tether-
your Hyundai dealer in this respect. belt on the belonging point in the lug-
gage-compartment. The installing and
the use of a child-seat has to be done B230D03HP
according to the installing-manual,

which is added to the ISOFIX-seat.
1
45
1. To engage the child restraint seat to

properly in the center of the rear o Always follow the installation and
the ISOFIX anchor, insert the child
seat and may break, causing se- use instructions provided by the
restraint seat latch into the ISOFIX manufacturer of the child restraint.
anchor. Listen for the audible "click" rious injury or death.
sound. o When using the vehicle’s “ISOFIX” B180B03HP-AAT
2. Connect the tether strap hook to the system to install a child restraint Pre-tensioner Seat Belt
child restraint hook holder and tighten system in the rear seat, all unused (If Installed)
to secure the seat. Refer to "Secur- vehicle rear seat belt metal latch
ing a Child Restraint System with the plates or tabs must be latched
Tether Anchorage System" on page securely in their seat belt buckles
1-43. and the seat belt webbing must be
retracted behind the child restraint
to prevent the child from reaching
! WARNING:
and taking hold of unretracted seat
belts. Unlatched metal latch plates
o Do not install a child restraint or tabs may allow the child to
seat at the center of the rear seat reach the unretracted seat belts
using the vehicle's ISOFIX an- which may result in strangulation
chors. The ISOFIX anchors are and a serious injury or death to the HXG229
only provided for the left and child in the child restraint. Your Hyundai vehicle is equipped with
right outboard rear seating posi- o Do not mount more than one child driver's and front passenger's pre-
tions. Do not misuse the ISOFIX restraint to a child restraint lower tensioner seat belts. The purpose of
anchors by attempting to attach anchorage point. The improper the pre-tensioner is to make sure that
a child restraint seat in the middle increased load may cause the an- the seat belts fit tightly against the
of the rear seat to the ISOFIX chorage points or tether anchor to occupant's body in certain frontal col-
anchors. In a crash, the child break, causing serious injury or lisions.
restraint seat ISOFIX attachments death. The pre-tensioner seat belts can be
may not be strong enough to o Attach the ISOFIX or ISOFIX-com- activated alone or, where the frontal
secure the child restraint seat patible child restraint seat only collision is severe enough, together
to the appropriate locations with the airbags.
shown in the illustration.
46
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if 1. SRS airbag warning light o When the pre-tensioner seat belts
the occupant tries to lean forward too 2. Seat belt pre-tensioner assembly are activated, a loud noise may
quickly, the seat belt retractor will lock 3. SRS control module be heard and fine dust, which
into position. In certain frontal colli- may appear to be smoke, may be
sions, the pre-tensioner will activate visible in the passenger compart-
and pull the seat belt into tighter con-
tact against the occupant's body.
! WARNING:
ment. These are normal operat-
ing conditions and are not haz-
To obtain maximum benefit from a ardous.
Driver's airbag 1 pre-tensioner seat belt: o Although it is harmless, the fine
Passenger's
airbag dust may cause skin irritation
1. The seat belt must be worn cor- and should not be breathed for
rectly. prolonged periods. Wash your
2. The seat belt must be adjusted to hands and face thoroughly after
the correct position. an accident in which the pre-
tensioner seat belts were acti-
3 vated.
NOTE:
2 o Both the driver's and front
passenger's pre-tensioner seat
B180B01HP belts will be activated in certain
The seat belt pre-tensioner system frontal collisions. The pre-
consists mainly of the following com- tensioner seat belts can be acti-
ponents. vated alone or, where the frontal
Their locations are shown in the illus- collision is severe enough, to-
tration. gether with the airbags.
1
47
o Improper handling of the pre-

! CAUTION: ! WARNING: tensioner seat belt assemblies,
o Because the sensor that activates o Pre-tensioners are designed to and failure to heed the warnings
the SRS airbag is connected with operate only one time. After acti- to not strike, modify, inspect, re-
pre-tensioner seat belt, the SRS vation, pre-tensioner seat belts place, service or repair the pre-
airbag warning light AIR
BAGon the must be replaced. All seat belts, tensioner seat belt assemblies
instrument panel will blink for of any type, should always be may lead to improper operation
approximately 6 seconds after replaced after they have been or inadvertent activation and se-
the ignition key has been turned rious injury.
worn during a collision.
to the "ON" position or after the o Always wear seat belts when driv-
engine is started, and then it o The pre-tensioner seat belt as-
sembly mechanisms become hot ing or riding in a motor vehicle.
should turn off.
o If pre-tensioner seat belt is not during activation. Do not touch
working properly, this warning the pre-tensioner seat belt as-
light will illuminate even if there semblies for several minutes af-
is no malfunction of the SRS ter they have been activated.
airbag. If the SRS airbag warning o Do not attempt to inspect or re-
light does not blink for about 6 place the pre-tensioner seat belts
seconds when the ignition key is yourself. This must be done by
turned to "ON" or the engine is an authorized Hyundai dealer.
started, or if it remains illumi- o Do not strike the pre-tensioner
nated after blinking for approxi- seat belt assemblies.
mately 6 seconds, or if it illumi- o Do not attempt to service or re-
nates while the vehicle is being pair the pre-tensioner seat belt
driven, please have an authorized system in any manner.
Hyundai dealer inspect the pre-
tensioner seat belts and SRS
airbag system as soon as pos-
sible.
48 SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
(AIRBAG) SYSTEM
B240A01HP-AAT The Hyundai SRS consists of airbags
(If Installed)
Driver's Airbag
installed under the pad covers in the
center of the steering wheel and the
! WARNING:
passenger's side front panel above o As its name implies, the SRS is
the glove box. The purpose of the SRS designed to work with, and be
is to provide the vehicle's driver and/or supplemental to, the driver's and
the front passenger with additional pro- the passenger's three point seat
tection than that offered by the seatbelt systems and is not a substi-
belt system alone, in case of a frontal tute for them. Therefore, your seat
impact of sufficient severity. belts must be worn at all times
while the vehicle is in motion.
NOTE: The airbags deploy only in cer-
Be sure to read information about tain frontal impact conditions
B240A01HP
the SRS on the labels provided on severe enough to likely cause
Your Hyundai is equipped with a the front of the sun visor and in the significant injury to the vehicle
Supplemental Restraint (Airbag) Sys- glove box. occupants.
tem. The indications of the system's o The SRS is designed to deploy
presence are the letters "SRS AIR the airbags only when an impact
BAG" embossed on the airbag pad is sufficiently severe and when
cover in the steering wheel and the the impact angle is less than 30°
passenger's side front panel pad above from the forward longitudinal axis
the glove box. of the vehicle and will not deploy
in side, rear or rollover impacts.
Additionally, the airbags will only
deploy once. Thus, seat belts
must be worn at all times.
o Front airbags are not intended to
deploy in light collisions in which
protection can be provided by
the seat belt alone.
1
49
o No objects should be placed over dren to ride in the front passen-

Rear impact or near the airbag modules on ger seat. If older children (teen-
the steering wheel, instrument agers and older) must ride in the
panel, and the front passenger's front seat, make sure they are
panel above the glove box, always properly belted and that
because any such object could the seat is moved back as far as
cause harm if the vehicle is in a possible.
crash severe enough to cause o For maximum safety protection
the airbags to deploy. in all types of crashes, all occu-
o If the airbags deploy, they must pants including the driver should
Side impact
be replaced by an authorized always wear their seat belts
Rollover B240A02HP Hyundai dealer. whether or not an airbag is also
o Front airbags are not intended to o Do not tamper with or discon- provided at their seating posi-
deploy in side-impact, rear-im- nect SRS wiring, or other com- tion to minimize the risk of se-
pact or rollover crashes. In addi- ponents of the SRS system. Do- vere injury or death in the event
tion, airbags will not deploy in ing so could result in injury, due of a crash. Do not sit or lean
frontal crashes below the deploy- to accidental firing of the airbags unnecessarily close to the airbag
ment threshold speed. or by rendering the SRS inopera- while the vehicle is in motion.
o The driver should sit back as far tive.
as possible while still maintain- o Do not install a child restraint
ing control of the vehicle. If you system in the front passenger
are sitting too close to the airbag, seat position. A child restraint
it can cause death or serious system must never be placed in
injury when it inflates. the front seat. The infant or child
could be severely injured or killed
by an airbag deployment in case
of an accident. Do not allow chil-
50
B240B01HP-GAT The SRS service reminder indicator

SRS Components and Functions (SRI) on the instrument panel will blink
for about 6 seconds after the ignition
key is turned to the "ON" position or
after the engine is started, after which
the SRI should go out.
B240B03L
B240B01L Upon deployment, tear seams molded

directly into the pad covers will sepa-
The SRS consists of the following com-
rate under pressure from the expan-
ponents:
sion of the airbags. Further opening of
the covers then allows full inflation of
- Driver's Airbag Module B240B02L
the airbags.
- Passenger's Airbag Module
- Knee Bolster The airbag modules are located both
in the center of the steering wheel and A fully inflated airbag in combination
- SRS Service Reminder Indicator
in the front passenger's panel above with a properly worn seat belt slows
(SRI)
the glove box. When the SRSCM de- the driver's or the passenger's forward
- SRS Control Module (SRSCM)
tects a considerable impact to the front motion, thus reducing the risk of head
of the vehicle, it will automatically de- or chest injury.
The SRSCM continually monitors all
elements while the ignition is "ON" to ploy the airbags.
After complete inflation, the airbag
determine if a frontal or near-frontal
immediately starts deflating, enabling
impact is severe enough to require
the driver to maintain forward visibility.
airbag deployment.
1
51
Passenger's Airbag Passenger's Airbag o The SRS can function only when
the ignition key is in the "ON"
position. If the SRS SRI does not
flash, or continuously remains
on after flashing for about 6 sec-
onds when the ignition key is
turned to the "ON" position or
after the engine is started, comes
on while driving, the SRS is not
working properly. If this occurs,
B240B01HP
B240B05L have your vehicle immediately
inspected by your Hyundai
dealer.
! CAUTION: ! WARNING:
o Before you replace a fuse or dis-
connect a battery terminal, turn
When installing a container of liq- o When the SRS is activated, there the ignition key to the "LOCK"
uid air freshener inside the vehicle, may be a loud noise and fine dust position or remove the ignition
do not place it near the instrument will be released through the ve- key. Never remove or replace the
cluster nor on the instrument panel hicle. These conditions are nor- air bag related fuse(s) when the
surface. If there is any leakage from mal and are not hazardous. How- ignition key is in the "ON" posi-
the air freshener onto these areas ever, the fine dust generated dur- tion. Failure to heed this warning
(Instrument cluster, instrument ing airbag deployment may cause will cause the SRS SRI to illumi-
panel or air ventilator), it may dam- skin irritation. Wash your hands nate.
age these parts. If the liquid from and face thoroughly with luke-
the air freshener does leak onto warm water and a mild soap after
these areas, wash them with water an accident in which the airbags
immediately. were deployed.
52
B240C01HP-GAT
SRS Care o For cleaning the airbag pad cov-
ers, use only a soft, dry cloth or
The SRS is virtually maintenance-free one which has been moistened
and so there are no parts you can with plain water. Solvents or
safely service by yourself. The entire cleaners could adversely affect
SRS system must be inspected by an the airbag covers and proper
authorized Hyundai dealer in 10 years deployment of the system.
after the date that the vehicle was o No objects should be placed over
manufactured. or near the airbag modules on
the steering wheel, instrument
Any work on the SRS system, such as B240C01HP panel, and the front passenger's
removing, installing, repairing, or any panel above the glove box, be-
work on the steering wheel must be cause any such object could
performed by a qualified Hyundai tech-
nician. Improper handling of the SRS
! WARNING:
cause harm if the vehicle is in a
crash severe enough to cause
system may result in serious personal o Extreme Hazard! Do not use a the airbags to inflate.
injury. rearward facing child restraint o If the airbags inflate, they must
on a seat protected by an airbag be replaced by an authorized
in front of it. Hyundai dealer.
o Modification to SRS components o Do not tamper with or discon-
or wiring, including the addition nect SRS wiring, or other com-
of any kind of badges to the pad ponents of the SRS system. Do-
covers or modifications to the ing so could result in injury, due
body structure, can adversely to accidental firing of the airbags
affect SRS performance and lead or by rendering the SRS inopera-
to possible injury. tive.
1
53
o Do not install a child restraint o Do not replace the bumper or the

system in the front passenger bumper guard with the one other
seat position. than the Hyundai genuine parts.
o A child restraint system must Otherwise, it can adversely af-
never be placed in the front seat. fect SRS performance and lead
The infant or child could be se- to unexpected injury.
verely injured by an airbag de-
ployment in case of an accident.
o If components of the airbag sys-
tem must be discarded, or if the
vehicle must be scrapped, cer-
tain safety precautions must be
observed. Your Hyundai dealer
knows these precautions and can
give you the necessary informa-
tion. Failure to follow these pre-
cautions and procedures could
increase the risk of personal in-
jury.
o If you sell your vehicle, make
certain that this manual is trans-
ferred to the new owner.
o If your car was flooded and has
soaked carpeting or water on
flooring, you shouldn't try to start
engine; have the car towed to
authorized Hyundai dealer.
54 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
B260A03HP-GAT
Gasoline Engine
Part-time 4WD:
Full-time 4WD:
B260A01HP
1
55
1. Tachometer 14.Front Fog Indicator Light

2. Turn Signal Indicator Light 15.Automatic Transmission Position Indicator Light (If Installed)
3. Coolant Temperature Gauge 16.Cruise Indicator Light (If Installed)
4. Fuel Gauge 17.4WD LOW Indicator Light
5. Speedometer 18.4WD HIGH Indicator Light (Part-time 4WD)
6. ABS Service Reminder Indicator (SRI) (If Installed) /4WD System Warning Light (Full-time 4WD)
7. Supplemental Restraint (AirBag) System 19.Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) (If Installed)
Service Reminder lndicator (SRI) (If Installed) 20.Trip Odometer
8. Low Oil Pressure Warning Light 21.Odometer
9. Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Light 22.Trip Odometer Reset Knob
10.Charging System Warning Light 23.Tail Gate Open Warning Light
11.A/T Oil Temperature Warning Light (If Installed) 24.Door Ajar Warning Light
12.Overdrive Off Indicator Light (If Installed) 25.Seat Belt Warning Light
13.High Beam Indicator Light 26.Low Fuel Warning Light
56
B260B03HP-GAT
Diesel Engine
Part-time 4WD:
Full-time 4WD:
B260B01HP
1
57
1. Tachometer 16.Overdrive Off Indicator Light (If Installed)

2. Turn Signal Indicator Light 17.High Beam Indicator Light
3. Coolant Temperature Gauge 18.Front Fog Indicator Light
4. Fuel Gauge 19.Automatic Transmission Position Indicator Light
5. Speedometer (If Installed)
6. Immobilizer Warning Light (2.9 CRDi only)(If Installed) 20.Cruise Indicator Light (If Installed)
7. Diesel Preheat Indicator Light 21.4WD LOW Indicator Light
8. ABS Service Reminder Indicator (SRI) (If Installed) 22.4WD HIGH Indicator Light (Part-time 4WD) /
9. Supplemental Restraint (AirBag) System Service 4WD System Warning Light (Full-time 4WD)
Reminder Indicator (SRI) (If Installed) 23.Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) (If Installed)
10.Fuel Filter Warning Light 24.Trip Odometer
11.Brake Vacuum Warning Light 25.Odometer
12.Low Oil Pressure Warning Light 26.Trip Odometer Reset Knob
13.Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level 27.Tail Gate Open Warning Light
Warning Light 28.Door Ajar Warning Light
14.Charging System Warning Light 29.Seat Belt Warning Light
15.A/T Oil Temperature Warning Light (If Installed) 30.Low Fuel Warning Light
58 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
B260D01A-AAT B260P02Y-AAT
Turn Signal Indicator ABS Service Reminder
Lights Indicator (SRI) ! WARNING:
The blinking green arrows on the in- (If Installed) If the both ABS SRI and Parking
strument panel show the direction indi- Brake/ Low Brake fluid level warn-
When the key is turned to the "ON" ing lights remain "ON" or come on
cated by the turn signals. If the arrow position, the Anti-Lock Brake System
comes on but does not blink, blinks while driving, there may be a prob-
SRI will come on and then go off in a lem with E.B.D (Electronic Brake
more rapidly than normal, or does not few seconds. If the ABS SRI remains
blink at all, a malfunction in the turn Force Distribution).
on, comes on while driving, or does not If this occurs, avoid sudden stops
signal system is indicated. Your dealer come on when the key is turned to the
should be consulted for repairs. and have your vehicle checked by
"ON" position, this indicates that there your Hyundai dealer as soon as
may be a problem with the ABS. possible.
If this occurs, have your vehicle
checked by your Hyundai dealer as
soon as possible. The normal braking
system will still be operational, but
B260F01A-AAT
without the assistance of the anti-lock
brake system. High Beam Indicator
Light
The high beam indicator light comes
on whenever the headlights are
switched to the high beam or flash
position.
1
59
B260G01A-AAT
should be checked by an autho- Warning Light Operation
Low Oil Pressure
rized Hyundai dealer before the car The parking brake/low brake fluid level
Warning Light is driven again. warning light should come on when the
parking brake is applied and the igni-
! CAUTION: tion switch is turned to "ON" or
If the oil pressure warning light "START". After the engine is started,
stays on while the engine is run- B260H02A-GAT the light should go out when the park-
ning, serious engine damage may Parking Brake / Low ing brake is released.
result. The oil pressure warning Brake Fluid Level Warn- If the parking brake is not applied, the
light comes on whenever there is ing Light warning light should come on when the
insufficient oil pressure. In normal ignition switch is turned to "ON" or
operation, it should come on when "START", then go out when the engine
the ignition switch is turned on, ! WARNING:
starts. If the light comes on at any
then go out when the engine is other time, you should slow the vehicle
If you suspect brake trouble, have and bring it to a complete stop in a safe
started. If the oil pressure warning your brakes checked by a Hyundai
light stays on while the engine is location off the roadway.
dealer as soon as possible. Driving The brake fluid level warning light indi-
running, there may be a serious your car with a problem in either the
malfunction. cates that the brake fluid level in the
brake electrical system or brake brake master cylinder is low and hy-
If this happens, stop the car as hydraulic system is dangerous, and
soon as it is safe to do so, turn off draulic brake fluid conforming to DOT
could result in a serious injury or 3 or DOT 4 specifications should be
the engine and check the oil level. If death.
the oil level is low, fill engine oil to added. After adding fluid, if no other
the proper level and start the en- trouble is found, the car should be
gine again. If the light stays on with immediately and carefully driven to a
the engine running, turn the engine Hyundai dealer for inspection. If fur-
off immediately. In any instance ther trouble is experienced, the vehicle
where the oil light stays on when should not be driven at all but taken to
the engine is running, the engine a dealer by a professional towing ser-
vice or some other safe method.
60
Your Hyundai is equipped with dual- B260J01S-GAT B260A01B-GAT
diagonal braking systems. This means Charging System Front Fog Indicator Light
you still have braking on two wheels Warning Light
even if one of the dual systems should The charging system warning light This front fog indicator light comes on
fail. With only one of the dual systems should come on when the ignition is whenever the front fog lamp switches
working, more than normal pedal travel turned on, then go out when the engine are on.
and greater pedal pressure are re- is running. If the light stays on while the
quired to stop the car. Also, the car will engine is running, there is a malfunc-
not stop in as short a distance with only tion in the electrical charging system. If B260L01A-GAT
half of the brake system working. If the the light comes on while you are driv- Door Ajar Warning Light
brakes fail while you are driving, shift ing, stop, turn off the engine and check
to a lower gear for additional engine under the hood. First, make certain the
braking and stop the car as soon as it The door ajar warning light warns you
generator drive belt is in place. If it is, that a door is not completely closed.
is safe to do so. check the tension of the belt.
And then, have the system checked by
your Hyundai dealer. B260M01A-AAT
Low Fuel Level Warning
Light
! CAUTION: The low fuel level warning light comes
If the drive belt (generator belt) is on when the fuel tank is approaching
loosen, broken, or mission while empty. When it comes on, you should
the vehicle is driving, there may be add fuel as soon as possible. Driving
a serious malfunction, engine could with the fuel level warning light on or
overheat because this belt also with the fuel level below "E" can cause
drives the water pump. the engine to misfire and damage the
catalytic converter.
1
61
B260B01B-GAT B260N02A-AAT B260Q01HP-DAT

Tail Gate Open Warning Malfunction Indicator Cruise Indicator Light
Light Light (If Installed) (For Gasoline Engine)
This light remains on unless the tail This light illuminates when there is a (If Installed)
gate is completely closed and latched. malfunction of an exhaust gas related The cruise indicator light in the instru-
component, and the system is not ment cluster is illuminated only when
functioning properly so that the ex- the vehicle cruising speed has been
B260B01HP-GAT
haust gas regulation values are not set using the control switch on the
SRS (Airbag) Service satisfied. This light will also illuminate steering wheel.
Reminder Indicator (SRI) when the ignition key is turned to the The indicator light does not illuminate
(If Installed) "ON" position, and then it will go out in when the main cruise control switch is
The SRS service reminder indicator a few seconds after the engine is activated. Information about the use of
(SRI) comes on and flashes for about started. If it illuminates while driving, or cruise control may be found on page 1-
6 seconds after the ignition key is does not illuminate when the ignition 100.
turned to the "ON" position or after the key is turned to the "ON" position, take
engine is started, after which it will go your car to your nearest authorized
out. Hyundai dealer and have the system B265Q01HP-GAT
checked. Cruise Indicator Light

This light also comes on when the SRS
(For Diesel Engine)
is not working properly. If the SRI does (If Installed)
B260E01HP-GAT
not flash, or continuously remains on Seat Belt Warning Light The cruise indicator light in the instru-
after flashing for about 6 seconds when ment cluster is illuminated when the
you turned the ignition key to the "ON" cruise control main switch is activated.
position or started the engine, or if it The seat belt warning light blinks for Information about the use of cruise
comes on while driving, have the SRS about 6 seconds when the ignition key control may be found on page 1-100.
inspected by an authorized Hyundai is turned from the "OFF" position to
Dealer. "ON" or "START".
62
B260C01A-AAT B260R01HP-GAT
O/D OFF Indicator 4WD LOW Indicator Light
(Automatic Transmission ! CAUTION:
only) If the warning light doesn't go off or When the key is turned to the "ON"
blinks, this indicates that there is a position, the 4WD(Four Wheel Drive)
When the overdrive switch is turned
malfunction in the automatic trans- LOW indicator light will come on and
on, the overdrive off indicator will go
mission or T.C.U (Transmission then go off in a few seconds.
out. This amber indicator will be illumi-
Control Unit). If this occurs, have The 4WD low indicator light comes on
nated when the overdrive switch is
your vehicle checked by an autho- when the transfer shift knob is set to
turned off.
rized Hyundai dealer. LOW position (Part-time 4WD type :
4L position, Full-time 4WD type : Low
B260U01HP-DAT B260U01TB-GAT position).
A/T(Automatic Transmis- Immobilizer Warning
sion) Oil Temperature Light (Diesel Engine (2.9
Warning Light CRDi)) (If Installed) B260T02HP-GAT
(If Installed) 4WD HIGH Indicator Light

This indicator light comes on for some (Part-time 4WD only)
The A/T oil temperature warning light seconds after the ignition key is turned
comes on when the automatic trans- to the "ON" position. At this time, you When the key is turned to the "ON"
mission oil temperature goes up to the can start the engine. The light goes out position, the 4WD(Four Wheel Drive)
temperature that may result in serious after the engine is running. In case this HIGH indicator light will come on and
damage of automatic transmission. light goes out before you start the then go off in a few seconds.
If the A/T oil temperature warning light engine, you must turn to the "LOCK" The 4WD HIGH indicator light will illu-
comes on while driving, park your ve- position and restart the engine. In case minate when the transfer shift knob is
hicle in at a safe place as soon as this light blinks for five seconds when set to 4H position.
possible. With the selector lever shifted the ignition key is turned to "ON" posi-
into "P" position, allow the engine to tion, this indicates that the immobilizer
idle until the warning light goes off. system is out of order. At this time,
When the warning light goes off, the refer to the explanation of the Limp
vehicle can be driven normally. home procedure(See page 1-9) or con-
sult to the Hyundai dealer.
1
63
! CAUTION: ! CAUTION: ! CAUTION(2.9 CRDi only):

If the 4WD HIGH indicator light ( ) If the 4WD system warning light When the fuel filter warning light is
illuminates with the 4WD LOW indi- ( ) blinks while driving, this illuminated, the engine power de-
cator light ( ) while driving, this indicates that there is a malfunc- creases. If the fuel filter warning
indicates that there is a malfunction in the 4WD system. If this oc- light comes on while driving, park
tion in the 4WD system. If this occurs, have your vehicle checked by your vehicle in at a safe place and
curs, have your vehicle checked by an authorized Hyundai dealer as remove the water as soon as pos-
an authorized Hyundai dealer as soon as possible. sible. If the light remains on after
soon as possible. removing the water, have the sys-
tem checked by an authorized
B265A01HP-GAT
Hyundai dealer.
Fuel Filter Warning Light
B265T01HP-GAT
4WD System Warning (Diesel Engine)
Light (Full-time 4WD This light illuminates when the ignition
only) switch is set to the "ON" position and
goes off after the engine has started. If
When the key is turned to the "ON" it lights up while the engine is running,
position, the 4WD (Four wheel drive) it indicates that water has accumu-
system warning light will come on and lated inside the fuel filter. If this hap-
then go off in a few seconds. pens, remove the water from the fuel
filter.
(Refer to "Do-lt-Yourself Maintenance")
64
B265B01HP-GAT should slow the vehicle and bring it to Water temperature Illuminating time
Brake Vacuum Warning a complete stop in a safe location off (°C) (2.5 TCI) (sec)
Light (Diesel Engine) the roadway. Below -30 22.5
After starting the engine, do not drive
-20 8
the vehicle until the vacuum level is
! WARNING: above 275 mmHg below atmosphere -15 6
and warning light has turned off. If 60 0.5
If you suspect brake trouble, have 80
further trouble is experienced, the ve- 0
your brakes checked by a Hyundai
dealer as soon as possible. Driving hicle should not be driven at all but
your car with a problem in either the taken to a dealer by a professional
Water temperature Illuminating time
brake electrical system or brake towing service.
(°C) (2.9 CRDi) (sec)
hydraulic system is dangerous, and Below -30 26
could result in serious injury or -25
B265C02HP-GAT 20
death.
Diesel Preheat Indicator -20 15
Light -15 10
The brake vacuum warning light should -10 5.5
come on when the vacuum level in The indicator light illuminates amber
when the ignition switch is placed at -5 3.5
brake booster descends to about 275 0 2
mmHg or below. The brake system is the "ON" position. The engine can be
started after the preheat indicator light 20 1
designed to stop the vehicle with re-
serve assist if brake pedal is held goes off. The illuminating time varies NOTE:
down. This reserve is greatly reduced with the water temperature. If the engine were not started within
each time you release the brake. With- 2 seconds after the preheating is
out vacuum assist your vehicle can still completed, turn the ignition key
be stopped by pushing much harder once more to the "LOCK" position
on brake pedal, however the stopping during 10 seconds, and then to the
distance may be much longer. If the "ON" position, in order to preheat
light comes on at any other time, you again.
1
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 65
B270A01A-GAT B280A01A-AAT B290A02A-AAT

BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING FUEL GAUGE ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERA-
SOUND (If Installed) TURE GAUGE
The front disc brake pads have wear
indicators that should make a high-
pitched squealing or scraping noise
when new pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all the
time when the vehicle is moving. It
may also be heard when the brake
pedal is pushed down firmly. Exces-
sive rotor damage will result if the worn
pads are not replaced. See your HHP2080
Hyundai dealer immediately. The needle on the gauge indicates the HHP2081
approximate fuel level in the fuel tank.

The fuel capacity is given in Section 9.
! WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when
the engine is hot. The engine cool-
ant is under pressure and could
erupt and cause severe burns. Wait
until the engine is cool before re-
moving the radiator cap.
66
The needle on the engine coolant tem- B330A01L-AAT

TACHOMETER
perature gauge should stay in the nor-
mal range. If it moves across the dial to Gasoline Engine
! CAUTION:
"H" (Hot), pull over and stop as soon as The engine should not be raced to
possible and turn off the engine. Then such a speed that the needle enters
open the hood and, after the engine the red zone on the tachometer face.
has cooled, check the coolant level This can cause severe engine dam-
and the water pump drive belt. If you age and may void your warranty.
suspect cooling system trouble, have
your cooling system checked by
Hyundai dealer as soon as possible.
B330A01HP
Diesel Engine
HHP2078
The tachometer registers the speed of

your engine in revolutions per minute
(rpm).
1
67
B300A01Y-GAT B310A02HP-GAT
Diesel Engine (2.9 CRDi)
SPEEDOMETER ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER
Gasoline Engine Odometer
Trip Odometer
B300A03HP
B300A01HP
Your Hyundai's speedometer is cali-
brated in kilometers per hour or miles Odometer
B310A01HP
Diesel Engine (2.5 TCI) per hour.
The digital odometer records the total
driving distance in kilometers or miles,
and is useful for keeping a record for
maintenance intervals.
It is normal for a new vehicle to have
the odometer indicating less than 50km.
NOTE:
Any alteration of the odometer may
B300A02HP
void your warranty coverage.
68
Trip Odometer
B310A03HP
Reset Knob B310A02HP

Trip odometer records the distance of
Pushing in the reset knob under the 2 trips in kilometers or miles.
right side of the speedometer for less
than 1 second when the ignition switch TRIP A: First distance you have trav-
is turned "ON" displays the following eled from your origination point to a
sequence: first destination.
TRIP B: Second distance from the first

destination to the final destination.
When the reset knob is pressed for

more than 1 second, trip odometer will
reset to 0.
1
MULTIMETER 69
B990A01HP-GAT B990B02HP-GAT
(If Installed) HOW TO ADJUST MULTIMETER
Switch function
Switch Function
Altimeter Relative Altimeter
Barometer
Mode (Press it for less than 2 sec.)
Selecting of time adjustment
mode
(Press it for more than 2 sec.)
Altimeter correction
(Up),
Setting altitude to "0"
(Down)
Time adjustment
Light Illumination on/off
Selecting correction mode
Adjust
of azimuth indicator
HHP2189
6. Down switch
1. Digital Clock 7. Road display responsive to vehicle
2. Azimuth Compass speed
3. Altimeter/Relative altimeter/Barom- 8. Mode conversion switch
eter 9. Light switch
4. Azimuth adjustment switch
5. Up switch
70
B990C01HP-GAT
How to correct azimuth indica- vicinity of a transformer station,
ELECTRICAL AZIMUTH COM- tor etc.). The azimuth is displayed nor-
PASS mally after escaping those places.
1. If you push and hold the "ADJ"
Azimuth Compass switch for less than 3 seconds, the
azimuth indicator will start to blink.
B990D01HP-GAT
ALTIMETER
HHP2190
It displays 16 azimuths according to

the vehicle driving direction and the
angle of one graduation is 22.5°. HHP2191
2. Slowly rotate the vehicle one turn HHP2194

NOTE: within 128 seconds.
If new vehicle is first driven or if the 3. After the rotation is finished, the Altimeter is operated by atmospheric
battery has been disconnected, azimuth compass indicator will stop pressure. The air pressure variation is
correct the azimuth indicator be- blinking and now correcting error is converted to the altitude on the basis
fore driving. made. of the sea level(0m, it is equal to
1013.25hpa) by the 50m.
Correcting azimuth indicator NOTE: The measurement range is 0~2,800m.
It is normal if the azimuth is dis- And when the altitude is under 50m, it
This is need to correct the error be- is displayed to 0m.
tween a current azimuth of terrestrial played abnormally in specific
magnetism sensor and the displayed places(tunnel, parking lot in build-
azimuth in the vehicle position. ing, basement garage, area in the
1
71
Altitude Correction B990E01HP-GAT When you want to know the differ-

RELATIVE ALTIMETER ence of altitude between the desti-
Displayed altitude could vary even at nation and the starting point:
same place because of air pressure
variation at sea level(0m point). So you
can correct this display error in ±300m Destination
range by pushing " (up)", " (down)"
as listed in following table.
Switch Pushing time Altitude

Less than 0.5 sec. Increasing by 50m The difference of altitude
between the destination
(Up) Increasing by 50m and the starting point : 1000 m
More than 0.5 sec.
gradually HHP2195
Less than 0.5 sec. Decreasing by 50m Starting point
Relative altimeter is used when you HHP2196
(Down) Decreasing by 50m want to know the altitude of the spe-
More than 0.5 sec.
gradually cific location. And it displays by com- 1. Press the " (Up)" and " (Down)"
paring the altitude of the specific loca- switch simultaneously for more than
tion with the current altitude which the 1 second to reset the current alti-
vehicle is located in. tude to 0m.
When the "MODE" switch is pressed 2. After arriving, the displayed altitude
for less than 2 seconds, the relative is the difference of altitude between
altimeter mode is selected. the destination and the starting point.
72
B990F01HP-GAT B990G01HP-GAT B990H01HP-GAT

BAROMETER DIGITAL CLOCK ROAD DISPLAY RESPONSIVE
TO VEHICLE SPEED
HHP2193 HHP2198
HHP2199
The current air pressure is displayed in If you press "MODE" switch for more
hpa units where the measurement than 2 seconds, the mode that you can The road display indicator blinks ac-
range is from 720hpa to 1,045hpa.(The adjust the time is displayed. cording to the vehicle speed.
minimum is 1hpa)
If the "MODE" switch is pressed for How to adjust the time
Vehicle speed Blinking cycle
less than 2 seconds from "Relative 1. In time adjustment mode, push the Total Lightening
Below 2.8 km/h
Altimeter" mode, the atmospheric pres- "MODE" switch briefly, and you can
sure will be displayed on the display 2.8 ~ 40 km/h 1 second
adjust "minute". And if you push
window. "MODE" switch once more briefly, 41 ~ 60 km/h 0.8 second
you can adjust "hour". 61 ~ 80 km/h 0.5 second
2. Adjust the time by pushing " (UP)", 81 ~ 100 km/h 0.3 second
" (DOWN)" switch when the time Above 100 km/h 0.2 second
blinks.
3. After adjusting the time, push
"MODE" switch for more 2 seconds,
and the mode for adjusting the time
is cancelled.
1
MULTI-FUNCTION LIGHT 73
SWITCH
B340A01A-AAT B340B01A-AAT B340C04L-AAT
COMBINATION TURN SIGNAL, Lane Change Signal Headlight Switch
HEADLIGHT AND HIGH-BEAM
SWITCH
Turn Signal Operation
Pulling down on the lever causes the
turn signals on the left side of the car to
blink. Pushing upwards on the lever
causes the turn signals on the right
side of the car to blink. As the turn is
completed, the lever will automatically
return to the center position and turn
HHP2099
off the turn signals at the same time. If HHP2094
either turn signal indicator light blinks To indicate a lane change, move the To operate the headlights, turn the bar-
more rapidly than usual, goes on but lever up or down to a point where it rel on the end of the multi-function
does not blink, or does not go on at all, begins flashing. switch. The first position turns on the
there is a malfunction in the system. The lever will automatically return to parking lights, side lights, tail lights and
Check for a burned-out fuse or bulb or the center position when released. instrument panel lights. The second
see your Hyundai dealer. position turns on the headlights.
NOTE:
The ignition must be in the "ON"
position to turn on the headlights.
Parking Light Auto Cut
o The purpose of this feature is to
prevent the battery from being dis-
charged. The system automatically
turns off the small light when the
driver removes the ignition key and
opens the driver- side door.
74
o With this feature, the parking lights B340D01A-AAT B340E01A-AAT
will be turned off automatically if the High-beam Switch Headlight Flasher

driver parks on the side of road at
night.
If necessary, to keep the lights on
when the ignition key is removed,
perform the following :
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parking lights OFF and
ON again using the light switch on
the steering column.
HHP2097 HHP2098
B340F01A-GAT To turn on the headlight high beams, To flash the headlights, pull the switch
Daytime Running Lights push the lever forward (away from lever toward you, then release it. The
(If Installed) you). The High Beam Indicator Light headlights can be flashed even though
Your Hyundai is equipped with day- will come on at the same time. For low the headlight switch is in the "OFF"
time running lights. The daytime run- beams, pull the lever back toward you. position.
ning lights are used to improve visibil-
ity for oncoming traffic. Your vehicle
daytime running lights are designed to
remain on continuously when the en-
gine is operating even though the head-
light switch is in the "OFF" position.
However, the daytime running lights
will be off while the parking brake is
applied.
1
FOG LIGHT SWITCH WINDSHIELD WIPER AND 75
WASHER SWITCH
B360B01Y-AAT B360A01HP-GAT B350A01A-AAT
Front Fog Light Switch Rear Fog Light Switch
(If Installed)
HHP2101
HHP2100 The windshield wiper switch has three

To turn on the front fog lights, place the B360A01HP positions:
switch in the "ON" position. They will To turn on the rear fog lights, push the
light when the headlight switch is in the switch. They will light when the head- 1. Intermittent wiper operation
first or second position. light switch is in the second position or 2. Low-speed operation
the front fog light is turned on and the 3. High-speed operation
key is in the "ON" position.
NOTE:
To prevent damage to the wiper
system, do not attempt to wipe away
heavy accumulations of snow or
ice. Accumulated snow and ice
should be removed manually. If
there is only a light layer of snow or
ice, operate the heater in the de-
frost mode to melt the snow or ice
before using the wiper.
76
B350B01O-GAT o In areas where water freezes in B350C01O-AAT

Windshield Washer Operation winter, use windshield washer Adjustable Intermittent Wiper
antifreeze. Operation
Mist Wiper Operation
HHP2103
To use the windshield washer, pull the HHP2102
wiper/washer lever toward the steer-

To use the intermittent wiper feature,
ing wheel. When the washer lever is HHP2104
place the wiper switch in the "INT"
operated, the wipers automatically
If a single wipe is desired in mist, push position. With the switch in this posi-
make two passes across the wind-
the windshield wiper and washer con- tion, the interval between wipes can be
shield. The washer continues to oper-
trol lever upwards. varied from approximately 1 to 18 sec-
ate until the lever is released.
onds by turning the interval adjuster
barrel. This is also varied automati-
NOTE: cally depending on your road speed.
o Do not operate the washer more
than 15 seconds at a time or when
the fluid reservoir is empty.
o In icy or freezing weather, be
sure the wiper blades are not
frozen to the glass prior to oper-
ating the wipers.
1
HAZARD WARNING SYS- 77
TEM
B390A01E-AAT
NOTE: B370A01A-AAT
Rear Window Wiper and Washer Do not operate the washer continu-
Switch ously for more than 15 seconds or
when the fluid reservoir is empty;
this could damage the system. Do
not operate the wiper when the win-
dow is dry; this can result in scratch-
ing as well as premature wiper blade
wear.
For the same reason, do not oper-
ate the washer when the washer
fluid reservoir is empty. B370A01HP
The hazard warning system should be

HHP2108 used whenever you find it necessary
1. : The rear window wiper starts to stop the car in a hazardous location.
to operate three times after the When you must make such an emer-
washer fluid sprays onto the gency stop, always pull off the road as
rear window. far as possible.
2.OFF The hazard warning lights are turned
3.INT: The interval between wipes op- on by pushing in the hazard switch.
erates every 5 seconds inter- This causes all turn signal lights to
mittently. blink. The hazard warning lights will
4.ON : The rear window wiper starts operate even though the key is not in
to operate continuously. the ignition.
5. :The washer fluid will be sprayed To turn the hazard warning lights off,
onto the rear window and the push the switch a second time.
wiper operates while the rear
window wiper barrel is placed
in this position.
78 FRONT/REAR WINDOW DE- DIGITAL CLOCK
FROSTER SWITCH
B380A03HP-AAT B400A01HP-GAT
(If Installed) (Without Multimeter)
Type A
! CAUTION:
Do not clean the inner side of the
front/rear window glass with an
abrasive type of glass cleaner or
use a scraper to remove foreign
deposits from the inner surface of
Type B the glass as this may cause dam-
age to the defroster elements.
HHP2119
NOTE: B400A01HP
The engine must be running for the
The front/rear window defroster and front/rear window defroster to oper- There are five control buttons for the
heated outside rear view mirrors are ate. digital clock. Their functions are:
turned on by pushing in the switch. At
the same time, the front/rear window 1. HOUR - Push "H" to advance the
defroster indicator light on the switch is hour indicated.
turned on. To turn the defroster off, 2. MIN - Push "M" to advance the
push the switch a second time. The minute indicated.
front/rear window defroster automati- 3. RESET - Push "S" to reset minutes
cally turns itself off after about 20 to ":00" to facilitate resetting the
minutes. To restart the defroster cycle, clock to the correct time. When this
push in the switch again after it has is done:
turned itself off. Pressing "S" between 11 : 01 and 11
: 29 changes the readout to 11 : 00.
Pressing "S" between 11 : 30 and 11
: 59 changes the readout to 12 : 00.
1
INSTRUMENT PANEL LIGHT CIGARETTE LIGHTER 79
CONTROL (RHEOSTAT)
4. MODE - Push "MODE" button to B410A01A-AAT B420A02A-AAT
display a 12- or 24-hour clock. (If Installed)

When the 12-hour clock is in use,
the letters AM or PM appear with the
time.
5. - The time is displayed on the
LCD by pushing in on the switch
and is turned off by pushing in on the
switch again.
If your vehicle is equipped with the

multimeter, see the page 1-72.
HHP2160
B410A01HP For the cigarette lighter to work, the key
The instrument panel lights can be must be in the "ACC" position or the
made brighter or dimmer by turning the "ON" position.
instrument panel light control knob. To use the cigarette lighter, push it all
the way into its socket. When the
element has heated, the lighter will
pop out to the "ready" position.
Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed
in. This can damage the heating ele-
ment and create a fire hazard.
If it is necessary to replace the ciga-
rette lighter, use only a genuine Hyundai
replacement or its approved equiva-
lent.
80 POWER OUTLET
B500D08HP-AAT These supply 12V electric power to
(If Installed)
! CAUTION:
operate electric accessories or equip-
ment only when the key is in the "ON"
Do not use electric accessories or or "ACC" position.
equipment other than the Hyundai
genuine parts in the socket.
! CAUTION:
o Use when the engine is running
and remove a plug from the power
outlet after using the electric ap-
pliance. Using when the engine
stops or remaining the electric
HHP2161 appliance with plugged in for
many hours may cause the bat-
tery to be discharged.
o Do not use the power outlet to
connect electric accessories or
equipment other than those de-
signed to operate on 12 volts.
o Some electronic devices can
cause electronic interference
when plugged into the power
outlet. These devices may cause
excessive audio noise and mal-
HHP2162 functions in other electronic sys-
The power outlet is located in front of tems or devices used in your
the center console and in the quarter vehicle.
trim. It is also located behind the cen-
ter console.
1
ASHTRAY DRINK HOLDER 81
B430A01HP-GAT B440A01E-AAT B450A02O-GAT

Front Ashtray Rear Ashtray Front Drink Holder
HHP2167 HHP2168 HHP2177
The front ashtray may be opened by The rear ashtray may be opened by The front drink holder is located on the
pushing and releasing the ashtray/ciga- pulling it out by its top edge. To remove main console for holding cups or cans.
rette lighter door at its top edge. the ashtray to empty or clean it, press
To remove the ashtray in order to
clean it, the metal ash receptacle should
down on the spring-loaded tab inside
the ashtray and lift the ashtray upward
! WARNING:
be removed from the ashtray door. Do and pull it all the way out. o Use caution when using the drink
not attempt to remove the entire ash- holders. A spilled beverage that
tray door assembly, or damage will is very hot can injure you or your
result. Instead, lift the metal ash re- passengers. Spilled liquids can
ceptacle upward and pull it out. To damage interior trim and electri-
reinstall it, place it in the proper posi- cal components.
tion and press it down and forward to o Do not place objects other than
reengage the ash receptacle rear lip in cups or cans in the drink holder.
the ashtray door. The ashtray light will Such objects can be thrown out
only illuminate when the exterior body in the event of a sudden stop or
lights are switched on. an accident, possibly injuring the
passengers in the vehicle.
82
B450C01HP-GAT B450B01HP-GAT
Rear Drink Holder (Type A) Rear Drink Holder (Type B)
! WARNING: (If Installed)
o Use caution when using the drink
holders. A spilled beverage that
is very hot can injure you or your
passengers. Spilled liquids can
damage interior trim and electri-
cal components.
o Do not place objects other than
cups or cans in the drink holder.
Such objects can be thrown out
HHP2178
in the event of a sudden stop or
an accident, possibly injuring the
The rear drink holder is located behind passengers in the vehicle. B450B01HP
the center console for holding cups or The rear drink holder is located in the
cans. The rear drink holder can be rear seat arm rest for holding cups or
used by pressing the locking release cans. The rear drink holder can be
button. used by opening the lid of arm rest.
! CAUTION: ! WARNING:
When not in use or before folding Do not place objects other than
the second seat, place the rear drink cups or cans in the drink holder.
holder in closed position to pre- Such objects can be thrown out in
vent it from being broken. the event of a sudden stop or an
accident, possibly injuring the pas-
sengers in the vehicle.
1
COIN HOLDER SUNSHADE SUNROOF 83
B505D01HR-GAT B470A01HP-AAT B460A01S-AAT

(If Installed) (If Installed)
The sunroof can be operated with the
ignition key in the "ON" position.
B460B01HP-GAT
Opening or Closing the Sunroof
HHP2173
HHP2023
The coin holder is used to store coins.
The sunshade can be opened and
closed by sliding it forward or rearward
when the sunroof is closed. The sun-
shade will open automatically when
the sunroof is opened, but it must be
closed manually.
B460B01HP
The sunroof can be electrically opened

! WARNING: or closed. The sunroof is moved to its
Never adjust the sunshade while fully open position by pushing the
driving. "Open" button, and to stop at the de-
sired position, push in any buttons
(OPEN, CLOSE, UP, DOWN).
84
To close, press and hold the "CLOSE" B460C01S-AAT B460D01HP-GAT
button. Release the button when the Tilting the Sunroof Manual Operation of Sunroof
sunroof reaches the desired position.
! WARNING:
o Do not close a sunroof if anyone's
hands, arms or body are between
the sliding glass and the sunroof
sash, as this could result in an
injury.
o Do not place your head or arms B460C01HP HHP2021
out of the sunroof opening at any The sunroof can be tilted by pushing
time. If the sunroof does not electrically oper-
the "UP" button with the sunroof closed. ate:
Release the button when the sunroof
reaches the desired position. To close 1. Remove the round plug in the front
the sunroof, press the "DOWN" but- of the roof panel with a flat-bladed
! CAUTION: ton. screwdriver or coin.
o Do not open the sunroof in se-
verely cold temperature or when NOTE:
it is covered with ice or snow. After washing the car or after there ! CAUTION:
o Periodically remove any dirt that is rain, be sure to wipe off any water
Remove the round plug with the
may have accumulated on the that is on the sunroof before oper-
groove pointing to the front and the
guide rails. ating it.
rear. Otherwise, the projections of
the plug may break if it is not posi-
tioned properly.
1
INTERIOR LIGHT 85
B480B01Y-AAT B490A03Y-AAT
Map Light Interior Light
HHP2022
2. Insert the hexagonal head wrench

B480B01HP HHP2115
provided with the vehicle into the
socket. This wrench can be found in Push in the map light switch to turn the The interior courtesy light has three
the glove box. light on or off. This light produces a buttons. The three buttons are:
3. Turn the wrench clockwise to open spot beam for convenient use as a
or counterclockwise to close. map light at night or as a personal light o DOOR
for the driver and the passenger.
In the "DOOR" position, the interior
courtesy light comes on when any
door is opened regardless of the igni-
tion key position. The light goes out
gradually 6 seconds after the door is
closed.
86 STORAGE BOX
o ON B500A01A-AAT B500B01HP-DAT
GLOVE BOX MULTI BOX
In the "ON" position, the light stays on
at all times.
! CAUTION:
Do not leave this button pressed for
an extended period of time when
the vehicle is not running.
o OFF HHP2169 HHP2174
In the "OFF" position, the light stays off The multi box may be opened by pulling
at all times even though a door is open. ! WARNING:
it out by its grip. It is used for storing
small articles.
To avoid the possibility of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden
stop, the glove box door should be
kept closed when the car is in mo-
tion.
o To open the glove box, pull on the

glove box release lever.
1
CENTER CONSOLE COM- 87
PARTMENT
B505A01HP-GAT B505B01HP-GAT
Center Console Box Center Console Armrest
! WARNING:
To avoid the possibility of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden
stop, the center console box lid
should be kept closed when the car
is in motion.
(1)
HHP2170 HHP2172
To use the center console armrest,

press the locking release button.
NOTE:
When not in use, fix the console
armrest by pushing down it with
the locking release button pressed.
(2)
HHP2171
The center console box is used for

storing cassette tape or small articles.
To use the center console box, press
the button (1) or (2) and pull up the lid.
88 OUTSIDE REARVIEW
MIRROR
B510A01A-AAT B510B01Y-AAT
Manual Type Electric Type (If Installed)
! CAUTION:
If the mirror control is jammed with
ice, do not attempt to break it free
using the control handle or by ma-
nipulating the face of the mirror.
Use an approved spray de-icer (not
radiator antifreeze) to release the
frozen mechanism or move the ve-
hicle to a warm place and allow the
ice to melt.
B510A01HP B510B01HP
The outside rearview mirrors are The outside rearview mirrors can be
equipped with a remote control for adjusted to your preferred rear vision,
your convenience. It is operated by the both directly behind the vehicle, and to
control lever in the bottom front corner the rear of the left and right sides.
of the window. The remote control outside rearview
Before driving away, always check mirror switch controls the adjustments
that your mirrors are positioned so you for both right and left outside mirrors.
can see behind you, both to the left and
right sides, as well as directly behind
your vehicle. When using the mirror,
always exercise caution when attempt-
ing to judge the distance of vehicles
behind or along side of you.
1
89
B510D02HP-GAT
To adjust the position of either
OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
mirror: ! CAUTION: HEATER (If Installed)
o Do not operate the switch con-
1. Move the selecting switch to the Type A
tinuously for an unnecessary
right or left to activate the adjustable
length of time.
mechanism for the corresponding
o Scraping ice from the mirror face
door mirror.
could cause permanent damage.
2. Adjust mirror angle by depressing
To remove any ice, use a sponge,
the appropriate perimeter switch as
soft cloth or approved de-icer. Type B
illustrated.
! WARNING: HHP2119
Be careful when judging the size or The outside rearview mirror heater is
distance of any object seen in the actuated in connection with the front/
passenger side rearview mirror. It rear window defroster. To heat the
is a convex mirror with a curved outside rearview mirror glass, push in
surface. Any objects seen in this the switch for the front/rear window
mirror are closer than they appear. defroster. The rearview mirror glass
will be heated for defrosting or defog-
B510B02HP ging and will give you improved rear
vision in inclement weather conditions.
Push the switch again to turn the heater
off. The outside rearview mirror heater
automatically turns itself off after 20
minutes.
90 SIDE UNDER VIEW MIRROR DAY/NIGHT INSIDE REAR-
VIEW MIRROR
B510C01A-AAT B515A01HP-GAT B520A01A-AAT
FOLDING THE OUTSIDE REAR- (If Installed)
VIEW MIRRORS
HHP2071
HHP2076 Your Hyundai is equipped with a day/

HHP2074 Traffic and road conditions can be night inside rearview mirror. The "night"
To fold the outside rearview mirrors, viewed on the lower right-hand side of position is selected by flipping the tab
push them towards the rear. the vehicle with the side under view at the bottom of the mirror toward you.
The outside rearview mirrors can be mirror. In the "night" position, the glare of
folded rearward for parking in narrow headlights of cars behind you is re-
areas. duced.
! WARNING:
Do not adjust or fold the outside
rearview mirrors while the vehicle
is moving. This could result in loss
of control, and an accident causing
death, serious injury or property
damage.
1
PARKING BRAKE 91
B520B02O-GAT B530A02A-AAT
Electric type (If Installed)
! CAUTION:
Driving with the parking brake ap-
plied will cause excessive brake pad
(or lining) and brake rotor wear.
o To release the parking brake, first

apply the foot brake and pull the
praking brake lever slightly. Sec-
ondly, depress the release button
B530A01HP and lower the parking brake lever
HLZ2068-1
Always engage the parking brake be- while holding the button.
The electric type day/night inside rear- fore leaving the car. This also turns on
view mirror automatically controls the the parking brake indicator light when
glare of headlights of the car behind the key is in the "ON" or "START"
you. position. Before driving away, be sure
that the parking brake is fully released
1. Pressing the button turns the auto- and the indicator light is off.
dimming function OFF which is indi-
cated by the green status indicator o To engage the parking brake, first
LED turning off. apply the foot brake and then without
2. Pressing the button again turns pressing the release button in, pull
the auto-dimming function ON which the parking brake lever up as far as
is indicated by the green status indi- possible. In addition it is recom-
cator LED turning on. mended that when parking the ve-
NOTE: hicle on a gradient, the shift lever
The mirror defaults to the "ON" posi- should be positioned in the appropri-
tion each time the vehicle is started. ate low gear on manual transmission
vehicles or in the P (Park) position on
automatic transmission vehicles.
92 TAIL GATE CD AUTO CHANGER
B540A01FC-GAT o The tail gate can be locked or un- B800A01HP-AAT
locked with a key. (If Installed)

o The tail gate is opened by pulling the
outside handle up, raising the tail
gate manually.
o To close, lower the tail gate, then
press down on it until it is closed. To
be sure the tail gate is fully closed,
always try to pull it up again without
using the outside handle.
B540A01HP
HHP2185
! WARNING:
The CD Auto Changer is located in the
right side of the luggage compartment.
The tail gate should always be kept This system can store up to 8 CDs.
completely closed while the vehicle You may select music without chang-
is in motion. If it is left open or ajar, ing discs. First, open the CD Auto
poisonous exhaust gases may en- Changer door, remove the CD maga-
ter the car resulting in serious ill- zine, and insert up to 8 CDs. Then,
ness or death to the occupants. See push the magazine into the CD Auto
additional warnings concerning ex- Changer. The CD may be operated
haust gases on page 2-2. with the passenger compartment au-
dio system controls.
NOTE:
The magazine can be taken out when
the ignition key is in the "ON" posi-
tion.
1
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT 93
B540C01HP-GAT B540D02HP-DAT
Luggage Compartment Light Luggage Net
! CAUTION:
To prevent damage to the goods or
the vehicle, care should be taken
when carrying fragile or bulky ob-
jects in the luggage compartment.
! WARNING:
Avoid eye injury. DO NOT over-
HHP2117 HHP2180 stretch. ALWAYS keep face and
Luggage compartment light has a 3- Some objects can be kept in the net at body out of recoil path. DO NOT
position switch. The three positions the luggage compartment. use when strap has visible signs of
are: Use the luggage net on the floor or at wear or damage.
the back of the luggage compartment
o In the "MIDDLE" position, the lug- to prevent objects from sliding.
gage compartment light comes on
when the tail gate is opened, then
goes out when it is closed.
o In the "ON" position, the light stays
on at all times.
o In the "OFF" position, the light stays
off at all times.
94 CARGO SECURITY SCREEN ROOF RACK
B640A01S-AAT B650A01S-AAT B630A01HP-GAT
(If Installed) Stowage Precautions (If Installed)
1. Do not place objects on the cargo (1)
security screen. Such objects may
be thrown about inside the vehicle
and possibly injure vehicle occu-
(2)
pants during an accident or when
braking.
2. For better fuel economy, do not
carry unnecessary weight.
3. Never allow anyone to ride in the
luggage compartment. It is designed
B640A01HP for luggage only. HHP2181
4. Try to maintain the balance of the
To use the security screen, pull it out of If your Hyundai has a roof rack, you can
vehicle and locate the weight as far
the retractor and hook it to the anchors load things on top of your vehicle. The
forward as possible.
as illustrated. two cross bars (1) on the roof rack can
be repositioned forward and rearward
for conveniently loading cargo or lug-
gage. With an assistant on the opposite
side of the vehicle, press and hold the
slider lock buttons (2) on each side,
then move the cross bar to the desired
position.
The cross bars automatically lock when
the slider lock buttons are released.
1
HIGH-MOUNTED REAR 95
STOP LIGHT
B550A01A-AAT
o Always drive your vehicle at a (If Installed)
! CAUTION: moderate speed.
o The cross bars should be posi- o Loading cargo or luggage over
specification on the roof rack may
tioned before carrying a load on
the roof rack. damage stability of your vehicle.
o In case the sunroof is equipped,
do not position roof rack loads
that could interfere with opening
of the sunroof.
o The following specification is rec-
ommended when loading cargo
or luggage.
B550A01HP
34 kg (75 lb) In addition to the lower-mounted rear

ROOF RACK EVENLY DIS- stop lights on either side of the car, the
TRIBUTED high mounted rear stop light in the
o Loading cargo or luggage above center of the rear window also lights
34 kg (75 lb) on the roof rack may when the brakes are applied.
damage your vehicle.
When you carry large objects,
never let them hang over the rear
or the sides of your vehicle.
o To prevent damage or loss of
cargo as you are driving, check
frequently to make sure the lug-
gage carrier and cargo are still
securely fastened.
96 REMOTE FUEL-FILLER LID
RELEASE
B560A02HP-GAT
o Automotive fuels are flammable/
explosive materials. When refuel-
ing, please note the following
guidelines carefully.
- Before touching the fuel nozzle
or fuel filler cap, have one's
hands in contact with metal
parts away from the filler neck
to discharge static electricity.
- Do not get back in the vehicle
HHP2015-D
while refueling. Do not operate
B560A01HP anything that can produce static
The fuel-filler lid may be opened from electricity. Static electricity dis-
inside the vehicle by pulling up on the ! WARNING:
charge can ignite fuel vapors
resulting in an explosion.
fuel-filler lid release lever located be-
Fuel vapors are dangerous. Before - When using a portable fuel con-
low the right of the driver's side crash
refueling, always stop the engine tainer, be sure to place the con-
pad.
and never allow sparks or open tainer on the ground while refu-
flames near the filler area. If you eling. Static electricity dis-
NOTE: need to replace the filler cap, use a charge from the container can
If the fuel-filler lid will not open genuine Hyundai replacement part. ignite fuel vapors causing a
because ice has formed around it, If you open the fuel filler cap during fire. While starting refueling,
tap lightly or push on the lid to high ambient temperatures, a slight contact should be maintained
break the ice and release the lid. Do "pressure sound" may be heard. until the filling is complete.
not pry on the lid. If necessary, This is normal and not a cause for - Do not use cellular phones
spray around the lid with an ap- concern. around a gas station. The elec-
proved de-icer fluid (do not use Whenever you open the fuel filler tric current or electronic inter-
radiator anti-freeze) or move the cap, turn it slowly. ference from cellular phones
vehicle to a warm place and allow
can ignite fuel vapors and cause
the ice to melt.
a fire.
1
HOOD RELEASE 97
B570A01HP-AAT
- When refueling, always turn the
engine off. Sparks by electrical
equipment of the engine can
ignite fuel vapors causing a
fire. After refueling, check to
make sure the fuel filler cap is
securely closed, and then start
the engine.
- Do not smoke or try to light
cigarettes around a gas station.
Automotive fuels are flam- HHP2017
mable. HHP2016
2. Push the secondary latch lever side-
1. Pull the release knob to unlatch the ways and lift the hood.
hood. 3. Raise the hood by hand.
98 SUN VISOR
B580A01HP-AAT
! WARNING:
Do not place the sun visor in such
a manner that it obscures visibility
of the roadway, traffic or other ob-
jects.
HHP2017-1
Vanity mirror
B580A01HP
When closing the hood, slowly close
Your Hyundai is equipped with sun
the hood and make sure it locks into
visors to give the driver and front pas-
place.
senger either frontal or sideward shade.
To reduce glare or to shut out direct
rays of the sun, turn the sun visor
! WARNING: down.
o Always double check to be sure A vanity mirror is provided on the back
that the hood is firmly latched of the sun visor for the front passen-
before driving away. If it is not ger.
latched, the hood could open
while the vehicle is being driven, NOTE:
causing a total loss of visibility, The Supplemental Restraint Sys-
which might result in an acci- tem (SRS) label containing useful
dent. information can be found on the
o Do not move the vehicle with the front of each sun visor(If Installed).
hood in the raised position, as
vision is obstructed and the hood
could fall or be damaged.
1
FRONT DOOR EDGE HORN REAR SEAT ARMREST 99
WARNING LIGHT
B620A01S-AAT B610A01L-GAT B611A01HP-AAT
(If Installed) (If Installed)
HHP2070
B620A01HP Press the pad on the steering wheel to HHP2048
A red light comes on when the front door sound the horn. The rear seat armrest is located in the
is opened. The purpose of this light is to center of the rear seatback. A storage
assist when you get in or out and also box and two drink holders are included
to warn passing vehicles. for convenience.
100 STEERING WHEEL TILT HEADLIGHT LEVELING DE-
LEVER VICE SYSTEM
B600A01HP-GAT B340G01HP-GAT
(If Installed) (If Installed) Switch
LOADING CONDITION
position
Driver only 0
Driver + Front Passenger 0
Full Passengers 1
Full passengers + Maximum
2
Permissible Loading
Driver + Maximum
3
Permissible Loading
B600A01HP B340G01HP
To adjust the steering wheel: To adjust the headlight beam level ac-
cording to the number of the passen-
1. Pull the lever toward you and hold it gers and the loading weight in the lug-
to unlock. gage area, turn the beam leveling switch.
2. Raise or lower the steering wheel to The higher the number of the switch
the desired position. position, the lower the headlight beam
3. After adjustment, release the lever. level. Always keep the headlight beam
at the proper leveling position, or head-
lights may dazzle other road users.
! WARNING: Listed below are the examples of proper
switch settings. For loading conditions
Do not attempt to adjust the steer-
other than those listed below, adjust
ing wheel while driving as this may
the switch position so that the beam
result in loss of control of the ve-
level may be the nearest as the condi-
hicle and serious injury or death.
tion obtained according to the list.
1
CRUISE CONTROL 101
B660A01S-AAT B660B01HP-AAT
NOTE:
(If Installed) To Set the Cruise Speed The "CRUISE" indicator light in the
instrument cluster will illuminate
after you have set the vehicle speed
at the desired speed (Gasoline En-
gine Only).
4. Remove your foot from the accel-

erator pedal and the desired speed
will automatically be maintained.
5. To increase speed, depress the
accelerator pedal enough for the
B660A01HP B660B01HP vehicle to exceed the preset speed.
When you remove your foot from
The cruise control system provides 1. Push in the cruise control main the accelerator pedal, the vehicle
automatic speed control for your com- switch. This turns the system on. will return to the speed you have
fort when driving on freeways, toll set.
roads, or other noncongested high- NOTE:
ways. This system is designed to func- The "CRUISE" indicator light in the NOTE:
tion above approximately 40 km/h(25 instrument cluster will be illumi- If the vehicle speed decreases more
mph). nated when the main cruise control than 15 km/h (9 mph) below the set
switch is activated(2.9 CRDi only). speed or decreases below 40 km/h
(25 mph), the cruise control system
2. Accelerate to desired cruising speed will automatically cancel the set
above 40 km/h(25 mph). speed.
3. Push the control switch "SET"
(COAST) position.
102
B660C02HP-AAT B660D01L-DAT B660F02L-GAT

To Cancel the Cruise Speed To Resume the Preset Speed To Reset at a Slower Speed
B660C01HP B660D01HP B660B01HP
To disengage the cruise control sys- The vehicle will automatically resume 1. Push the control switch "SET
tem, push the control switch "CAN- the speed set prior to cancellation when (COAST)" and hold it. While the
CEL". Additionally, the following ac- you push the control switch "RESUME control switch is pushed, the vehicle
tions will disengage the system: (ACCEL)" and release it to return (when speed will gradually decrease.
travelling above 40 km/h). 2. When the desired speed is obtained,
o Depress the brake pedal. release the control button.
o Depress clutch pedal (Manual trans- B660E01L-AAT
mission). To Reset at a Faster Speed
o Shift the selector lever to "N" posi-
tion (Automatic transmission). 1. Push the control switch "RESUME
o Decrease the vehicle speed lower (ACCEL)" and hold it.
than the memorized speed by 15 2. Accelerate to desired speed and
km/h(9 mph). release the control switch. While
o Decrease the vehicle speed to less the control switch is held, the ve-
than 40 km/h(25 mph). hicle will gradually gain speed.
o Release the main switch.
1
103
o During normal cruise control op-

! WARNING: eration, when the "SET" but-
o Keep the main switch off when ton is activated or reactivated
not using the cruise control. after applying the brakes, the
o Use the cruise control system cruise control will energize after
only when traveling on open high- approximately 3 seconds. This
ways in good weather. delay is normal.
o Do not use the cruise control
when it may not be safe to keep
the car at a constant speed, for
instance, driving in heavy or vary-
ing traffic, or on slippery (rainy,
icy or snow-covered) or winding
roads or over 6% up-hill or down-
hill roads.
o Pay particular attention to the
driving conditions whenever us-
ing the cruise control system.
o During cruise-control driving
with a manual transmission ve-
hicle, do not shift into neutral
without depressing the clutch
pedal or the engine will be
overrevved. If this happens, de-
press the clutch pedal or release
the main switch.
104 HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL
B710A01TB-GAT B710B01S-AAT
CENTER VENTILATOR
The center ventilators are located in
the middle of the dashboard. The di-
rection of air flow from the vents in the
center of the dashboard is adjustable.
To control the direction of the air flow,
move the knob in the center of the vent
up-and-down and side-to-side.
B710C02HP-AAT
SIDE VENTILATOR
The side ventilators are located on
each side of dashboard. To change
the direction of the air flow, move the
knob in the center of the vent up-and-
down and side-to-side. The vents are
opened when the vent knob is moved
to " " position. The vents are closed
when the vent knob is moved to " ".
Keep these vents clear of any obstruc-
tions.
1. Side Defroster Nozzle

B710B01HP
2. Side Ventilator
3. Windshield Defroster Nozzle
4. Center Ventilator
1
HEATING AND VENTILA- 105
TION
B670A01HP-GAT 4. Air flow control. B670B01A-AAT
This is used to direct the flow of air. Fan Speed Control

Air can be directed to the floor, (Blower Control)
dashboard outlets, or windshield.
Five symbols are used to represent
Face, Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost
and Defrost air positions.
B670A01HP
There are four controls for the heating

and cooling system. They are: HHP2123
This is used to turn the blower fan on

1. Fan speed control. and off and to select the fan speed.
This is used to turn the fan on and The blower fan speed, and therefore
select the fan speed. the volume of air delivered from the
2. Air intake control. system, may be controlled manually
This allows you to select fresh out- by setting the blower control between
side air or recirculation inside air. the "1" and "4" position.
3. Temperature control.
This is used to turn the heating
system on and off and to select the
degree of heating desired.
106
B670C02Y-AAT
NOTE: B670D01L-AAT
Air Intake Control It should be noted that prolonged Air Flow Control
operation of the heating system in
" " mode will give rise to fogging
of the windshield and side windows
and the air within the passenger com-
partment will become stale. In addi-
tion prolonged use of the air condi-
tioning with the " " mode selected
may result in the air within the pas-
senger compartment becoming ex-
cessively dry.
HHP2125
HHP2126
This is used to select fresh outside air This is used to direct the flow of air. Air
or recirculating inside air. can be directed to the floor, dashboard
outlets, or windshield. Five symbols
Fresh are used to represent Face, Bi-Level,
Recirculation Floor, Floor-Defrost and Defrost air
position.
With the " " mode selected, air enters
the vehicle from outside and is heated
or cooled according to the other func-
tions selected.
With the " " mode selected, air from
within the passenger compartment is
drawn through the heating system and
heated or cooled according to the other
functions selected.
1
107
B670D01HP B670D02HP B670D03HP
Face-Level Bi-Level Floor-Level
Selecting the "Face" mode will cause Air is discharged through the face vents Air is discharged through the floor
air to be discharged through the face and the floor vents. This makes it vents, windshield defroster nozzle, side
level vents. possible to have cooler air from the defroster nozzle and side ventilator.
dashboard vents and warmer air from
the floor outlets at the same time.
108
B670E02A-AAT
Temperature Control
B670D04HP B670D05HP
Cool Warm
Floor-Defrost Level Defrost-Level HHP2124
This control is used to adjust the degree

Air is discharged through the wind- Air is discharged through the wind- of heating or cooling desired.
shield defrost nozzle, the floor vents, shield defrost nozzle, side defroster
side defroster nozzle and side ventila- nozzle and side ventilator.
tor. If the "Defrost" mode is selected, the
If the "Floor-Defrost" mode is selected, A/C will turn on automatically and
the A/C will turn on automatically and "Fresh" mode will be activated to im-
"Fresh" mode will be activated. prove windshield defrosting.
1
HEATING CONTROLS BI-LEVEL HEATING VENTILATION 109
B690A02S-AAT B700A01A-AAT B710A01A-AAT
B690A01HP B700A01HP B710A01HP
For normal heating operation, set the air Your Hyundai is equipped with bi-level To operate the ventilation system:
intake control to the fresh air ( ) heating controls. This makes it pos-
position and the air flow control to the sible to have cooler air from the dash- o Set the air intake control at the fresh
floor ( ) position. board vents and warmer air from the air ( ) position.
floor outlets at the same time. To use o To direct all intake air to the dash-
For faster heating, the air intake con- this feature: board vents, set the air flow control
trol should be set in the recirculate ( ) to the face ( ) position.
position. o Set the air intake control to the fresh o Adjust the fan speed control to the
air ( ) position. desired speed.
If the windows fog up, set the air flow o Set the air flow control at the bi-level o Set the temperature control between
control to the defrost ( ) position (The ( ) position. "Cool" and "Warm".
A/C will turn on automatically and o Set the temperature control between
"Fresh" mode will be activated). "Cool" and "Warm".
For maximum heat, move the tem-

perature control to "Warm".
110 DEFROSTING/DEFOGGING
B720A02FC-AAT
NOTE:
When the A/C is operated continu-
ously on the floor-defrost level ( )
or defrost level ( ), it may cause
fog to form on the exterior wind-
shield. If this occurs, set the air
flow control to the face level posi-
tion ( ) and fan speed control to
the low position.
B720B01HP
B720A01HP
To remove frost or exterior fog on the
Use the heating/ventilation system to
windshield:
defrost or defog the windshield.
o Set the air flow control to the defrost
To remove interior fog on the wind- ( ) position.(The A/C will turn on
shield: automatically and "Fresh" mode will
be activated.)
o Set the air flow control to the defrost
o Set the temperature control to warm.
( ) position.(The A/C will turn on
o Set the fan speed control to position
automatically and "Fresh" mode will
"3" or "4".
be activated.)
o Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
o Set the fan speed control between
"1" and "4" position.
1
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 111
B730A01L-AAT B740A01S-AAT B740B01HP-GAT

Operation Tips (If Installed) Air Conditioning Operation
o To keep dust or unpleasant fumes Air Conditioning Switch Cooling
from entering the car through the
ventilation system, temporarily set
the air intake control to the po-
sition. Be sure to return the control
to the position when the irritation
has passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle. This will help keep the driver
alert and comfortable.
o Air for the heating/cooling system is
drawn in through the grilles just
ahead of the windshield. Care should B740A01HP B740B01HP
be taken that these are not blocked
by leaves, snow, ice or other ob- The air conditioning is turned on or off To use the air conditioning to cool the
structions. by pushing the A/C button on the heat- interior:
o To prevent interior fog on the winding/air conditioning control panel.
shield, set the air intake control to o Set the side vent control to " ", to
the fresh air ( ) position, and fan shut off the outside air entry.
speed to the desired position, turn o Turn on the fan control switch.
on the air conditioning system, and o Turn on the air conditioning switch
adjust temperature control to de- by pushing in on the switch. The air
sired temperature. conditioning indicator light should
come on at the same time.
o Set the air intake control to the fresh
air ( ) position.
112
o Set the temperature control to "Cool". B740C01A-AAT B740D01Y-AAT
("Cool" provides maximum cooling. De-Humidified Heating Operation Tips

The temperature may be moderated o If the interior of the car is hot when
by moving the control toward you first get in, open the windows for
"Warm".) a few minutes to expel the hot air.
o Adjust the fan control to the desired o When you are using the air condi-
speed. For greater cooling, turn the tioning system, keep all windows
fan control to one of the higher closed to keep hot air out.
speeds or temporarily select the o When moving slowly, as in heavy
recirculate ( ) position on the air traffic, shift to a lower gear. This
intake control. increases engine speed, which in
turn increases the speed of the air
B740C01HP conditioning compressor.
o On steep grades, turn the air condi-
For dehumidified heating:
tioning off to avoid the possibility of
the engine overheating.
o Turn on the fan control switch.
o During winter months or in periods
o Turn on the air conditioning switch.
when the air conditioning is not used
The air conditioning indicator light
regularly, run the air conditioning
should come on at the same time.
once every month for a few min-
o Set the air intake control to the fresh
utes. This will help circulate the
air ( ) position.
lubricants and keep your system in
o Set the air flow control to the face
peak operating condition.
( ) position.
o Adjust the fan control to the desired
speed.
o For more rapid action, set the fan at
one of the higher speeds.
o Adjust the temperature control to
provide the desired amount of
warmth.
1
AUTOMATIC HEATING AND 113
COOLING CONTROL SYSTEM
B970A01Y-AAT B970B01HP-GAT
(If lnstalled) Heating and Cooling Controls
Your Hyundai is equipped with an au-
tomatic heating and cooling control
system controlled by simply setting
the desired temperature.
B970B01HP
1. Blower Fan Control Switch 8. Air Flow Control Switch

2. AUTO (Automatic Control) Switch 9. Air Conditioning Switch
3. OFF Switch 10.Ambient Temperature Switch
4. Display Window 11.Air Intake Control Switch
5. Temperature Control Button (Recirculation air)
6. Defroster Switch 12.Air Intake Control Switch
7. Rear Window Defroster Switch (Fresh air)
(If Installed)
114
B970C02L-AAT
NOTE:
Automatic Operation If the battery has been discharged
or disconnected, the temperature
mode will reset to Centigrade de-
grees.
This is a normal condition and you
can change the temperature mode
from Centigrade to Fahrenheit as
follows;
Press the TEMP down ( ) button 3
seconds or more with the AMB
HHP2142
button held down.
HHP2138
2. Push the "TEMP" button to set the The display shows that the unit of
desired temperature. temperature is adjusted to Centi-
The FATC (Full Automatic Tempera- The temperature will increase to the grade or Fahrenheit
ture Control) system automatically maximum 32°C(90°F) by pushing (°C → °F or °F → °C).
controls heating and cooling as fol- on the button. Each push of the
lows: button will cause the temperature to
increase by 0.5°C(1°F).
1. Push the "AUTO" switch. The indi- The temperature will decrease to
cator light will illuminate confirming the minimum 17°C(62°F) by push-
that the Face, Floor and/or Bi-Level ing on the button. Each push of
modes as well as the blower speed the button will cause the tempera-
and, air conditioner will be controlled ture to decrease by 0.5°C(1°F).
automatically.
1
115
B995A01Y-AAT B980A01Y-AAT
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE MANUAL OPERATION
SWITCH The heating and cooling system can
Photo Sensor be controlled manually as well by push-
ing buttons other than the "AUTO"
button. In this state, the system se-
quentially works according to the order
of buttons selected.
The function of the buttons which are
not selected will be controlled auto-
matically.
HHP2096
Press the "AUTO" button in order to
NOTE: convert to automatic control of the
Never place anything over the sen- HHP2147 system.
sor which is located on the instru-
ment panel to ensure better control Pressing the AMB button displays the
of the heating and cooling system. ambient temperature on the display.
116
B980B01Y-AAT B670C03HP-GAT With the "Fresh" mode selected, air

Fan Speed Control Switch Air Intake Control Switch enters the vehicle from the outside and
is heated or cooled according to the
function selected.
With the "Recirculation" mode selected,

air from within the passenger compart-
ment will be drawn through the heating
system and heated or cooled accord-
ing to the function selected.
NOTE:
HHP2137 B980C01HP
It should be noted that prolonged
operation of the heating system in
The fan speed can be set to the desired This is used to select fresh outside air "recirculation" mode will give rise to
speed by pressing the appropriate fan or recirculation inside air. fogging of the windshield and side
speed control button. The higher the fan To change the air intake control mode, windows and the air within the pas-
speed is, the more air is delivered. push the control button. senger compartment will become
Pressing the "OFF" button turns off the stale. In addition, prolonged use of
fan. FRESH MODE ( ) : The indicator the air conditioning with the "Recir-
light on the button is illuminated when culation" mode selected may result
the air intake control is in fresh mode. in the air within the passenger com-
partment becoming excessively dry.
RECIRCULATION MODE ( ): The
indicator light on the button is illumi-
nated when the air intake control is in
recirculation mode.
1
117
B980D01Y-AAT B980E01L-GAT
Heating and Cooling System Off Air Flow Control
B670D01HP
HHP2145 Face-Level
HHP2140
Press the "OFF" button to stop the This is used to direct the flow of air. Air
operation of the heating and cooling can be directed to the floor, dashboard When selecting the "Face" mode, the
system. outlets, or windshield. Four symbols indicator light will come on, causing air
are used to represent Face, Bi-Level, to be discharged through the face level
Floor and Floor-Defrost air position. vents.
118
B670D02HP B670D03HP B670D04HP
Bi-Level Floor-Level Floor-Defrost Level
When selecting the "Bi-Level" mode, When selecting the "Floor-Level" mode,
When selecting the "Floor-Defrost"
the indicator light will come on and the the indicator light will come on and the
mode, the indicator light will come on
air will be discharged through the face air will be discharged through the floor and the air will be discharged through
vents and the floor vents. This makes vents, windshield defrost nozzle, side
the windshield defrost nozzle, the floor
it possible to have cooler air from the defroster nozzle and side ventilator.
vents, side defroster nozzle and side
dashboard vents and warmer air from ventilator.
the floor outlets at the same time.
1
THE CLIMATE CONTROL AIR 119
FILTER
B980F01O-GAT B760A07A-GAT
Defrost Switch (FOR EVAPORATOR AND
BLOWER UNIT) (If Installed) ! CAUTION:
o Replace the filter every 15,000 km
Blower (10,000 miles) or once a year.
Outside air
If the car is being driven in severe
conditions such as dusty, rough
roads, more frequent climate con-
trol air filter inspections and
Inside of changes are required.
a vehicle o When the air flow rate is de-
creased, it must be checked at
HHP2143
Filter Inside air authorized dealer.
When the "Defrost" button is pressed, Evaporator core B760A01Y
the " " mode will be automatically The climate control air filter is located in
selected and the air will be discharged front of the evaporator unit behind the
through the windshield defrost nozzle, glove box.
side defroster nozzle and side ventila- It operates to decrease the amount of
tor. To assist in defrosting, the air pollutants entering the car.
conditioning will operate if ambient tem- To replace the climate control air filter,
perature is higher than 3.5°C and au- refer to the page 6-23.
tomatically turns off if the ambient tem-
perature drops below 3.5°C.
120 STEREO SOUND SYSTEM
B750A02A-AAT
AM reception FM radio station
How Car Audio Works Ionosphere
FM reception Mountains Unobstructed
Ionosphere
area
Buildings
Iron bridges
B750A02L
Obstructed area B750A03L
AM broadcasts can be received at FM broadcasts are transmitted at high

B750A01L
greater distances than FM broadcasts. frequencies and do not bend to follow
AM and FM radio signals are broadcast This is because AM radio waves are the earth's surface. Because of this,
from transmitter towers located around transmitted at low frequencies. These FM broadcasts generally begin to fade
your city. They are intercepted by the long, low frequency radio waves can at short distances from the station.
radio antenna on your car. This signal is follow the curvature of the earth rather Also, FM signals are easily affected by
then received by the radio and sent to than travelling straight out into the buildings, mountains, or other obstruc-
your car speakers. ionosphere. In addition, they curve tions. These can result in certain lis-
When a strong radio signal has reached around obstructions so that they can tening conditions which might lead you
your vehicle, the precise engineering provide better signal coverage. to believe a problem exists with your
of your audio system ensures the best radio. The following conditions are nor-
possible quality reproduction. However, mal and do not indicate radio trouble:
in some cases the signal coming to
your vehicle may not be strong and
clear. This can be due to factors such
as the distance from the radio station,
closeness of other strong radio sta-
tions or the presence of buildings,
bridges or other large obstructions in
the area.
1
121
B750B02Y-AAT
Using a cellular phone or a two-
way radio
When a cellular phone is used inside
the vehicle, noise may be produced
from the audio equipment. This does
not mean that something is wrong with
the audio equipment. In such a case,
use the cellular phone at a place as far
as possible from the audio equipment.
B750A04L B750A05L
o Fading - As your car moves away

from the radio station, the signal will
o Station Swapping - As an FM signal
weakens, another more powerful sig-
! CAUTION:
weaken and sound will begin to fade. nal near the same frequency may When using a communication sys-
When this occurs, we suggest that begin to play. This is because your tem such as a cellular phone or a
you select another stronger station. radio is designed to lock onto the radio inside the vehicle, a separate
o Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or clearest signal. If this occurs, select external antenna must be fitted.
large obstructions between the another station with a stronger sig- When a cellular phone or a radio set
transmitter and your radio can dis- nal. is used by using an internal an-
turb the signal causing static or flut- o Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio sig- tenna alone, it may interfere with
tering noises to occur. Reducing the nals being received from several the vehicle's electrical system and
treble level may lessen this effect directions can cause distortion or adversely affect safe operation of
until the disturbance clears. fluttering. This can be caused by a the vehicle.
direct and a reflected signal from
the same station, or by signals from
two stations with close frequencies.
! WARNING:
If this occurs, select another station Don't use a cellular phone when
until the condition has passed. you are driving. You must stop at a
safe place to use a cellular phone.
122 AUDIO SYSTEM
H240A01O-GAT
STEREO RADIO OPERATION (H240) (If Installed)
5. BAND Selector 3. TREBLE/FADER Control Knob

(TREB/FAD)
2. BASS/BALANCE Control Knob

7. SCAN Button (BASS/BAL)
6. PRESET Buttons
4. TUNE/SEEK Select Button
1. POWER ON/OFF, VOLUME Control Knob
H240A01HP
1
123
H240B03O-AAT When the control knob is turned coun- SEEK Operation

1. POWER ON-OFF Control Knob terclockwise, left speaker sound will (Automatic Channel Selection)
The radio unit may be operated when be emphasized (right speaker sound
will be attenuated). Press the TUNE select button 0.5 sec
the ignition key is in the "ACC" or "ON"
or more. Releasing it will automatically
position. Press the knob to switch the
3. TREB (Treble) Control Knob tune to the next available station with a
power on. The LCD shows the radio
beep sound.
frequency in the radio mode or the Press to pop the knob out and turn to When the side is pressed longer than
tape direction indicator in the tape the left or right for the desired treble 0.5 second, releasing it will automati-
mode. To switch the power off, press tone. cally tune to the next higher frequency
the knob again.
and when the side is pressed longer
FAD (Fader) Control Knob than 0.5 second, releasing it will auto-
VOLUME Control matically tune to the next lower fre-
Pull the treble control knob further out.
Rotate the knob clockwise to increase quency.
Turn the control knob counterclock-
the volume and turn the knob counter- wise to emphasize front speaker sound
clockwise to reduce the volume. (rear speaker sound will be attenu- 5. BAND Selector
ated). Pressing the FM/AM button changes the
2. BASS Control Knob When the control knob is turned clock- AM, FM1 and FM2 bands. The mode
Press to pop the knob out and turn to wise, rear speaker sound will be em- selected is displayed on LCD.
the left or right for the desired bass phasized (front speaker sound will be
tone. attenuated). 6. PRESET STATION SELECT
Buttons
BAL (Balance) Control Knob 4. TUNE (Manual) Select Button
Six (6) stations for AM, FM1 and FM2
Pull the bass control knob further out. Press the side or side to increase respectively can be preset in the elec-
Turn the control knob clockwise to or to decrease the frequency. Press tronic memory circuit on this unit.
emphasize right speaker sound (left either button and hold down to continu-
speaker sound will be attenuated). ously scroll. Release button once the
desired station is reached.
124
HOW TO PRESET STATIONS o When completed, any preset sta-

tion may be recalled by selecting
Six AM and twelve FM stations may be AM, FM1 or FM2 band and the
programmed into the memory of the appropriate station button.
radio. Then, by simply pressing the
band select button and/or one of the
7. SCAN Button
six station select buttons, you may
When the scan button is pressed, the
recall any of these stations instantly.
To program the stations, follow these frequency will increase and the receiv-
able stations will be tuned in one after
steps:
another, receiving each station for 5
o Press band selector to set the band seconds. To stop scanning, press the
scan button again.
for AM, FM1, or FM2.
o Select the desired station to be
stored by seek or manual tuning.
o Determine the preset station select ! CAUTION:
button you wish to use to access o Do not place beverages close to
that station. the audio system. The audio sys-
o Press the station select button for tem mechanism may be damaged
more than two seconds. A select if you spill them.
button indicator will show in the dis- o Do not impact on the audio sys-
play indicating which select button tem, or the audio system mecha-
you have depressed. The frequency nism could be damaged.
display will flash after it has been
stored into the memory with a beep
sound. You should then release the
button, and proceed to program the
next desired station. A total of 18
stations can be programmed by
selecting one AM and two FM sta-
tions per button.
1
125
H240C01O-GAT
CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER OPERATION (H240) (If Installed)
3. TAPE PROGRAM Button

6. TAPE SLOT
2. AUTO MUSIC SELECT Button
4. EJECT Button
1. FF/REW Button
5. DOLBY SELECT Button
H240C01HP
126
H240D03O-AAT
3. TAPE PROGRAM Button
1. FF/REW Button
This allows you to play the reverse ! CAUTION:
o The FF (fast forward tape winding) side of the tape by merely pressing the o Do not insert anything like coins
starts when the button is press- program button. into the player slot as damage to
ed during PLAY or REW. An arrow will appear in the display to the unit may occur.
o PLAY starts when the button is show tape direction. o Do not place beverages close to
pressed again during the FF.
the audio system. The playback
o REW (rewinding) starts when the NOTE: mechanism may be damaged if
button is pressed during PLAY
When tape operation is abnormal you spill them.
or FF.
or ER8 fault code is displayed, Press o Do not impact on the audio sys-
o PLAY starts when the button is
eject button more than 5 seconds tem, or the playback mechanism
pressed again during REW.
to initialize the deck. could be damaged.
2. AUTO MUSIC SELECT Button 4. EJECT Button
Press the button to find the starting
o When the EJECT button is pressed
point of each song in a prerecorded
with a cassette loaded, the cassette
music tape.
will eject.
The quiet space between songs (must
o When the EJECT button is pressed
have at least a 4 sec. gap) can be
during FF/REW, the cassette will
identified by the AUTO MUSIC SE-
eject.
LECT button.
o Pressing the button will play the 5. DOLBY SELECT Button

beginning of the next music seg- If you get background noise during
ment. PLAY, you can reduce this consider-
o Pressing the button will start ably by merely pressing DOLBY SE-
replay at the beginning of the music LECT button.
just listened to. If you want to release, press the button
again.
1
127
H290A01E-GAT
STEREO RADIO OPERATION (H280) (If Installed)
8. BEST STATION MEMORY or
1. POWER ON/OFF, VOLUME Control Knob
SCAN Button (If Installed)
7. EQUALIZER Button
3. TREBLE/FAD Konb
2. BASS/BALANCE Control Knob

5. PRESET Buttons
4. TUNE/SEEK Select Button

6. BAND Select Button
H290A01HP
128
H290B03E-AAT
BALANCE Control knob 4. TUNE (Manual) Select Button
1. POWER ON-OFF Control Knob
Pull the Bass control knob out further. Press the ( ) side or ( ) side to
The radio unit may be operated when Rotate the knob clockwise to empha- increase or to decrease the frequency.
the ignition key is in the "ACC" or "ON" size right speaker sound (left speaker With the button held down for 0.5 sec.
position. Press the button to switch the sound will be attenuated). or more, the stop signal (broadcasting
power on. The display shows the radio When the control knob is turned coun- radio wave) is ignored and channel
frequency in the radio mode or the terclockwise, left speaker sound will selection continues.
tape direction indicator in the tape be emphasized (right speaker sound
mode, or CD track either the CD mode will be attenuated). SEEK Operation
or CD AUTO CHANGER mode. To
switch the power off, press the button (Automatic Channel Selection)
3. TREBLE/FAD Knob
again. Press the TUNE select button for 0.5
TREBLE Control Knob sec or more. Releasing it will automati-
VOLUME Control Press to pop the knob out and turn to
cally tune to the next available station
with a beep sound.
Rotate the knob clockwise to increase the left or right for the desired treble
tone. When the ( ) side is pressed longer
the volume and turn the knob counter-
than 0.5 second, releasing it will auto-
clockwise to reduce the volume.
matically tune to the next higher fre-
FAD (Fader) Control Knob quency and when the ( ) side is
2. BASS/BALANCE Control Further pull the popped-up knob. Turn pressed longer than 0.5 second, re-
Knob the control knob counterclockwise to leasing it will automatically tune to the
emphasize front speaker sound (rear next lower frequency.
BASS Control Knob speaker sound will be attenuated).
Press to pop the knob out. To increase When the control knob is turned clock-
5. PRESET STATION Select
the bass, rotate the knob clockwise, wise, rear speaker sound will be em-
phasized (front speaker sound will be Buttons
while to decrease the bass, rotate the
knob counterclockwise. attenuated). Six (6) stations for AM, FM1 and FM2
respectively can be preset in the elec-
tronic memory circuit.
1
129
HOW TO PRESET STATIONS o When completed, any preset sta- 8. Best Station Memory Button
tion may be recalled by selecting (BSM) (If Installed)
Six AM and twelve FM stations may be AM, FM1 or FM2 band and the
programmed into the memory of the appropriate station button. When the BSM button is pressed for
radio. Then, by simply pressing the two seconds or longer, the six chan-
band select button and/or one of the nels from the highest field intensity are
6. BAND Selector
six station select buttons, you may selected next and stored in memory.
recall any of these stations instantly. Pressing the FM/AM button changes
The stations selected are stored in the
To program the stations, follow these the AM, FM1 and FM2 bands. The sequence frequency from the first pre-
steps: mode selected is shown on the dis- set key.
play.
o Press band selector to set the band SCAN Button (If Installed)
for AM, FM1 and FM2. 7. EQUALIZER Button
o Select the desired station to be When the scan button is pressed, the
stored by seek or manual tuning. Press the EQ button to select the frequency will increase and the receiv-
o Determine the preset station select CLASSIC, JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT able stations will be tuned in one after
button you wish to use to access MODE for the desired tone quality. another, receiving each station for 5
that station. Each press of the button changes the seconds. To stop scanning, press the
o Press the station select button for display as follows; scan button again.
more than two seconds. A select
button indicator will show in the dis- CLASSIC → JAZZ → ROCK → DEFEAT
play indicating which select button ! CAUTION:
you have depressed. The frequency
o Do not place beverages close to
display will flash after it has been
the audio system. The audio sys-
stored into the memory with a beep
tem mechanism may be damaged
sound. You should then release the
if you spill them.
button, and proceed to program the
o Do not impact on the audio sys-
next desired station. A total of 18
tem, or the audio system mecha-
stations can be programmed by
nism could be damaged.
selecting one AM and two FM sta-
tions per button.
130
H290C01E-GAT
CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER OPERATION (H280) (If Installed)
5.EQUALIZER Button
4.TAPE EJECT Button
2.AUTO MUSIC
Select Button
1.FF/REW Button
6.DOLBY Button
3.TAPE PROGRAM Button
H290C01HP
1
131
H290D02O-GAT
3. TAPE PROGRAM Button 6. DOLBY Button
1. FF/REW Button
This allows you to play the reverse side If you get background noise during tape
o Fast forward tape winding starts when of the tape by merely depressing the PLAY, you can reduce this consider-
the FF ( ) button is pressed during program button. An arrow will appear in ably by merely pressing the DOLBY
the PLAY or REW mode. the display to show tape direction. button. If you want to cancel the DOLBY
o Tape play starts when the FF ( ) feature, press the button again.
button is pressed again during the 4. TAPE EJECT button
FF mode.
o Tape rewinding starts when the REW
( ) button is pressed during the
o When the button is pressed with
the cassette loaded, the cassette is
! CAUTION:
PLAY or FF mode. ejected. o Do not insert anything like coins
o Tape play starts when the REW ( ) o When the button is pressed into the player slot as damage to
button pressed again during the REW during the FF/REW mode, the cas- the unit may occur.
mode. sette is ejected. o Do not place beverages close to
the audio system. The playback
2. AUTO MUSIC Select Button 5. EQ Button mechanism may be damaged if
you spill them.
Press the button to find the starting Press the EQ button to select the CLAS- o Do not impact on the audio sys-
point of each song in a prerecorded SIC, JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT MODE tem, or the playback mechanism
music tape. The quiet space between for the desired tone quality. Each press could be damaged.
songs (must have at least a 4 sec. gap) of the button changes the display as
can be identified by the AUTO MUSIC follows;
Select button.
CLASSIC → JAZZ → ROCK → DEFEAT
o Pressing the button will play the
beginning of the next music seg-
ment.
o Pressing the button will start
replay at the beginning of the music
just listened to.
132
H290E01E-GAT
COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (H280) (If Installed)
6. CD EJECT Button
7. SCAN Button (If Installed)
5. EQUALIZER Button
3. TRACK UP/DOWN
2. FF/REW Button
4. REPEAT
1. CD Select Button
H290E01HP
1
133
H290F03O-GAT
3. TRACK UP/DOWN 6. CD EJECT Button
1. CD Select Button
o The desired track on the disc cur- When the button is pressed with
o Insert the CD with the label facing rently being played can be selected a CD loaded, the CD will eject.
upward. using the track number.
o Insert the CD to start CD playback, o Press button once to skip for- 7. SCAN Button (If Installed)
during radio operation or cassette ward to the beginning of the next
tape playing. track. Press button once to skip o Press the SCAN button to playback
o When a disc is in the CD deck, if you back to the beginning of the track. the first 10 seconds of each track.
press the CD/CDC button the CD o Press the SCAN button again within
player will begin playing even if the 10 sec. when you have reached the
4. REPEAT
radio or cassette player is being desired track.
used. o To repeat the track you are cur-
o The CD player can be used when rently listening to, press the RPT NOTE:
the ignition switch is in either the button. To cancel, press again. o To assure proper operation of
"ON" or "ACC" position. o If you do not release RPT operation the unit, keep the vehicle interior
when the track ends, it will automati- temperature within a normal
2. FF/REW ( / ) cally be replayed. range by using the vehicle's air
This process will be continued until conditioning or heating system.
If you want to fast forward or reverse you push the button again. o When replacing the fuse, replace
through the compact disc track, push
it with a fuse having the correct
and hold the FF ( ) or REW ( ) 5. EQUALIZER Button capacity.
button.
Press the EQ button to select the o The preset station frequencies
When you release the button, the com-
are all erased when the car bat-
pact disc player will resume playing. CLASSIC, JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT
tery is disconnected. Therefore,
MODE for the desired tone quality.
Each press of the button changes the all data will have to be set again
if this should occur.
display as follows;
CLASSIC → JAZZ → ROCK → DEFEAT

134
o Do not add any oil to the rotating o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CD-
parts. Keep magnets, screwdriv-
ers and other metallic objects
! CAUTION:
Rewritable as the player could not
be operated in recording way of
away from the tape mechanism o Do not insert warped or poor the CD maker. When using the
and head. quality discs into the CD player compact disc player, genuine
o This equipment is designed to as damage to the unit may occur. CDs are recommended.
be used only in a 12 volt DC o Do not insert anything like coins
battery system with negative into the player slot as damage to
ground. the unit may occur.
o This unit is made of precision o Do not place beverages close to
parts. Do not attempt to disas- the audio system. The playback
semble or adjust any parts. mechanism may be damaged if
o When driving your vehicle, be you spill them.
sure to keep the volume of the o Do not impact on the audio sys-
unit set low enough to allow you tem, or the playback mechanism
to hear sounds coming from the could be damaged.
outside. o Driving on the off-roads or other
o Do not expose this equipment vibrations may skip your com-
(including the speakers and tape) pact disc. Do not use the audio
to water or excessive moisture. system on off-roads as the discs
could be scratched and damaged.
o Do not grip or pull out the disc
with your hand while the disc is
being pulled into the unit by the
self loading mechanism. These
can cause poor disc scratching
to occur or trouble in the com-
pact disc player.
1
135
H290G01E-GAT
CD AUTO CHANGER (H280) (If Installed)
6. SCAN Button
(If Installed)
7. EQ Button
3. TRACK UP/DOWN
4. FF/REW Button
5. REPEAT
2. DISC Select Button
1. CD CHANGER Select Button

H290G01HP
136
B290H03HP-GAT
2. DISC Select Button o If you do not release RPT operation
The CD auto changer is located in the when the track ends, it will automati-
right side of the luggage compartment. To select the CD you want, push " TUNE
DISC
" cally be replayed.
to change the disc number. This process will be continued until
o To use the CD auto changer.
you push the button again.
1. Open the sliding lid of the CD auto
changer. 3. TRACK UP/DOWN 6. SCAN Button (If Installed)
2. To eject the compact disc maga- o The desired track on the disc cur- o Press the SCAN button to playback
zine, press the EJECT button lo- rently being played can be selected the first 10 seconds of each track.
cated inside the CD auto changer. using the track number. o Press the SCAN button again within
3. Insert the discs into the magazine. o Press once to skip forward to 10 sec. for the desired track.
4. Push the magazine into the CD auto the beginning of the next track. Press
changer and close the sliding lid. once to skip back to the begin-
ning of the track.
o The CD auto changer can be used 7. EQ Button
when the ignition switch is in either Press the EQ button to select the
4. FF/REW ( / ) CLASSIC, JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT
"ON" or "ACC" position.
If you want to fast forward or reverse MODE for the desired tone quality.
through the compact disc track, push Each press of the button changes the
1. CD CHANGER Select Button
and hold in the FF ( ) or REW ( ) display as follows;
When the CD changer magazine con- button.
tains discs, press the "CD/CDC" but- When you release the button, the com-
ton and the CD changer can be used pact disc player will resume playing. CLASSIC → JAZZ → ROCK → DEFEAT
even if the radio or cassette player is
being used. The Hyundai CD changer 5. REPEAT
can hold up to eight discs. The disc
number will be lit, and the track num- o To repeat the track you are listening
ber, and elapsed time will be displayed. to, press the RPT button. To cancel,
press again.
1
137
NOTE: o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CD-

o When replacing the fuse, replace
it with a fuse having the correct
! CAUTION: Rewritable as the player could not
be operated in recording way of
capacity. o Do not insert warped or poor
the CD maker. When using the
o This equipment is designed to quality discs into the CD changer
compact disc changer, genuine
be used only in a 12 volt DC as damage to the unit may occur.
CDs are recommended.
battery system with negative o Do not insert anything like coins
ground. into the changer slot as damage
o This unit is made of precision to the unit may occur.
parts. Do not attempt to disas- o Do not place beverages close to
semble or adjust any parts. the audio system. The playback
o When driving your vehicle, be mechanism may be damaged if
sure to keep the volume of the you spill them.
unit set low enough to allow you o Do not impact on the audio sys-
to hear sounds coming from the tem, or the playback mechanism
outside. could be damaged.
o Driving on the off-roads or other
vibrations may skip your com-
pact disc. Do not use the audio
system on off-roads as the discs
could be scratched and damaged.
o Do not grip or pull out the disc
with your hand while the disc is
being pulled into the unit by the
self loading mechanism. These
can cause poor disc scratching
to occur or trouble in the com-
pact disc player.
138
B890A01Y-AAT
AUDIO FAULT CODE
If you see any error indication in the display while using the system in the CD or Tape mode, find the cause in the chart below.
If you cannot clear the error indication, take the car to your Hyundai dealer.
INDICATION CAUSE SOLUTION

CD DECK MECHANICAL ERROR After resetting the audio system, push the eject button.
Er2
(EJECT ERROR, LOADING ERROR) If disc is not ejected, consult your Hyundai dealer.
Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
FOCUS ERROR
Er3 Press the eject button and pull out the disc.
DATA READ ERROR
Then insert a normal CD disc.
Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CD player.
Er6 DISC ERROR
Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
TAPE DECK ERROR After resetting the audio system, push the eject button.
Er8
TAPE EJECT ERROR If tape does not eject, consult your Hyundai dealer.
Fault code will reset automatically when the temperature returns
HHH TEMPERATURE IS TOO HIGH
to normal.
NO DISC IN MAGAZINE
Insert disc in magazine or insert CD magazine in the auto
no CD NO CD MAGAZINE IN THE AUTO
changer.
CHANGER
1
CARE OF DISCS 139
B850A02F-AAT
Damaged Disc Keep Your Discs Clean
Proper Handling
Do not attempt to play damaged,
warped or cracked discs. These could
severely damage the playback mecha-
nism.
Storage
When not in use, place your discs in
their individual cases and store them in
a cool place away from the sun, heat,
and dust.
B850A01L Do not grip or pull out the disc with your B850A02L
hand while the disc is being pulled into Fingerprints, dust, or soil on the sur-
Handle your disc as shown. Do not drop the unit by the self loading mechanism.
the disc. Hold the disc so you will not face of a disc could cause the pickup to
leave fingerprints on the surface. If the skip signal tracks. Wipe the surface
surface is scratched, it may cause the clean with a clean soft cloth.
pickup to skip signal tracks. Do not If the surface is heavily soiled, dampen
affix tape, paper, or gummed labels on a clean soft cloth in a solution of mild
the disc. Do not write on the disc. neutral detergent to wipe it clean.
140 CARE OF CASSETTE TAPES
B860A01A-AAT o Never leave a cassette inserted in o Be sure that the cassette label is not
the player when not being played. loose or peeling off or tape ejection
This could damage the tape player may be difficult.
unit and the cassette tape. o Never touch or soil the actual audio
o We strongly recommend against the tape surfaces.
use of tapes longer than C-60 (60 o Keep all magnetized objects, such
minutes total). Tapes such as C- as electric motors, speakers or trans-
120 or C-180 are very thin and do formers away from your cassette
not perform as well in the automo- tapes and tape player unit.
tive environment. o Store cassettes in a cool, dry place
with the open side facing down to
prevent dust from setting in the cas-
B860A01L
sette body.
Proper care of your cassette tapes will o Avoid repeated fast reverse usage
extend the tape life and increase your to replay one given tune or tape
listening enjoyment. Always protect section. This can cause poor tape
your tapes and cassette cases from winding to occur, and eventually
direct sunlight, severe cold and dusty cause excessive internal drag and
conditions. When not in use, cassettes poor audio quality in the cassette. If
should always be stored in the protec- this occurs, it can sometimes be
tive cassette case in which they were corrected by fast winding the tape
originally supplied. When the vehicle is from end to end several times. If this
B860A01HP
very hot or cold, allow the interior does not correct the problem, do not
temperature to become more comfort- continue to use the tape in your
able before listening to your cassettes. vehicle.
1
ANTENNA 141
B870A01A-GAT
Fixed Rod Antenna
Head
Cotton applicator
B860A02L B860A03L
o The playback head, capstan and NOTE: B870C01HP

pinch rollers will develop a coating Look at a tape before you insert it.
of tape residue that can result in Your car uses a fixed rod antenna to
If the tape is loose, tighten it by receive both AM and FM broadcast
deterioration of sound quality, such turning one of the hubs with a pen-
as a wavering sound. They should signals.
cil or your finger. This antenna is a removable type. To
be cleaned monthly using a com- If the label is peeling off, do not put
mercially available head cleaning remove the antenna, turn the antenna
it in the player. It may cause the counterclockwise. To install the an-
tape or special solution available tape jam in the drive mechanism
from audio specialty shops. Follow tenna, turn the antenna clockwise.
when you try to eject it.
the supplier's directions carefully and Do not leave tape sitting where they
never oil any part of the tape player
unit.
are exposed to hot warm or, high ! CAUTION:
humidity, such as on top of the Be sure to remove the antenna be-
o Always be sure that the tape is dashboard or in the player.
tightly wound on its reel before in- fore washing the car in an auto-
If a tape is exposed to excessively matic car wash or the antenna may
serting in the player. Rotate a pencil hot or cold, let it reach a moderate
in the drive sprockets to wind up any be damaged.
temperature before putting it in the
slack. player.
142
B880C02B-GAT
Glass Antenna (If Installed)
! CAUTION:
o Do not clean the inner side of the
rear quarter glass with an abra-
sive type of glass cleaner or use
a scraper to remove foreign de-
posits from the inner surface of
the glass as this may cause dam-
age to the antenna elements.
o Avoid adding metallic coating
such as Ni, Cd, and so on. These
can disturb receiving AM and FM
HHP2184
broadcast signals.
When the radio power switch is turned
on while the ignition key is in either the
"ON" or "ACC" position, your car will
receive both AM and FM broadcast
signals through the antenna in the rear
quarter glass.
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
Engine Exhaust Can Be Dangerous! ........................... 2-2

Before Starting the Engine ........................................... 2-3
Key Positions................................................................ 2-4
Starting ......................................................................... 2-5 2
Operating the Manual Transmission ............................ 2-7
Automatic Transmission ............................................... 2-9
Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) ............................................ 2-14
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................................. 2-21
2
Limited-Slip Differential (LSD) .................................... 2-22
Good Braking Practices ............................................. 2-22
Driving for Economy ................................................... 2-23
Smooth Cornering ...................................................... 2-25
Winter Driving ............................................................. 2-25
Trailer or Vehicle Towing ........................................... 2-28
2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
2
C010A01HP-AAT
! WARNING: ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!

Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle,
open the windows immediately.
o Do not inhale exhaust fumes.
Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death
by asphyxiation.
o Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.
The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose.
If you hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side
of the car, have the exhaust system checked as soon as possible by your Hyundai dealer.
o Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.
Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the
engine in your garage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the car out.
o Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car.
If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the car, be sure to do so only in
an open area with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn
into the interior.
If you must drive with the tail gate open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:
1. Close all windows.
2. Open side vents.
3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher
speeds.
To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of
the windshield are kept clear of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.
2
BEFORE STARTING THE 3
ENGINE
C020A02A-AAT
! WARNING:
Before you start the engine, you should
always:
! WARNING:
Your vehicle is equipped with tires Always wear appropriate shoes when
designed to provide for safe ride 1. Look around the vehicle to be sure operating your vehicle.
and handling capability. there are no flat tires, puddles of Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski
Do not use a size and type of tire oil, water or other indications of boots, etc.) may interfere with your
and wheel that is different from the possible trouble. ability to use the brake and accelera-
one that was originally installed on 2. After entering the car, check to be tor pedal, and the clutch (if installed).
your vehicle. It can affect the safety sure the parking brake is engaged.
and performance of your vehicle, 3. Check that all windows, and lights
which could lead to handling fail- are clean.
ure or rollover and serious injury. 4. Check that the interior and exterior
When replacing the tires, be sure to mirrors are clean and in position.
equip all four tires with the tire and 5. Check your seat, seatback and
wheel of the same size, type, tread, headrest to be sure they are in their
brand and load-carrying capacity. proper positions.
If you nevertheless decide to equip 6. Lock all the doors.
your vehicle with any tire/wheel 7. Fasten your seat belt and be sure
combination not recommended by that all other occupants have fas-
Hyundai for off-road driving, you tened theirs.
should not use these tires for high- 8. Turn off all lights and accessories
way driving. that are not needed.
9. When you turn the ignition switch
to "ON", check that all appropriate
warning lights are operating and
that you have sufficient fuel.
10. Check the operation of warning
lights and all bulbs when key is in
the "ON" position.
4 TO START THE ENGINE KEY POSITIONS
C030A01HP-GAT C040A02A-AAT
Combination Ignition Switch
! WARNING: (Diesel only) !
o If your Hyundai is equipped with a WARNING:
manual transmission, place the shift To ensure that sufficient vacuum
exists within the brake system dur- The engine should not be turned
lever in neutral and depress the off or the key removed from the
clutch pedal fully. ing cold weather start-up condi-
tions, it is necessary to run the ignition key cylinder while the ve-
o If your Hyundai has an automatic hicle is in motion. The steering
transmission, place the shift lever in engine at idle after starting accord-
ing to the following table. wheel is locked by removing the
"P" (park). key.
o To start the engine, insert the igni- Ambient temp. Warm up time
tion key and turn it to the "START" 3 min. or longer
Above -15°C (5°F)
position. Release it as soon as the
engine starts. Do not hold the key in Below -15°C (5°F) 6 min. or longer
the "START" position for more than ACC
After starting the engine, do not drive
15 seconds. the vehicle until the brake vacuum LOCK ON
warning light has turn-ed off.
NOTE: Failure to carry out the above proce-
For safety, the engine will not start dure may result in the need to apply
if the shift lever is not in "P" or "N" greater pedal pressure in order to
Position (Automatic Transmission). effect the necessary braking effort.
START
C040A01E
2
STARTING 5
o "START" NOTE: C050A01A-AAT
The engine is started in this position. It If difficulty is experienced in turning

will crank until you release the key. the ignition key to the START posi-
tion, turn the steering wheel right
NOTE: and left to release the tension and
Do not hold the key in the "START" then turn the key.
position for more than 15 seconds.
o "ON" C070C01A-AAT
When the key is in the "ON" position, To remove the ignition key
the ignition is on and all accessories
may be turned on. If the engine is not ACC C050A01E
running, the key should not be left in LOCK ON

the "ON" position. This will discharge
the battery and may also damage the ! WARNING:
ignition system.
Never run the engine in a closed or
o "ACC" poorly ventilated area any longer
START than is needed to move your car in
With the key in the "ACC" position,
some electrical accessories (radio, etc.) or out of the area. The carbon mon-
may be operated. oxide gas emitted is odorless and
C070C01E can cause serious injury or death.
o "LOCK" 1. Turn the ignition key to the "ACC"
The key can be removed or inserted in position.
this position. 2. Simultaneously push and turn the
To protect against theft, the steering ignition key counterclockwise from
wheel locks by removing the key. the "ACC" position to the "LOCK"
position.
3. The key can be removed in the
"LOCK" position.
6
C050B01HP-GAT (1) When the atmospheric tempera-

NORMAL CONDITIONS ture is moderate or the engine is
warm:
Starting Procedure: Start the engine without de-
Amber lamp ON Amber lamp OFF pressing the accelerator pedal.
1. Insert key and fasten the seat belt.
2. Apply the parking brake. (2) When the atmospheric tempera-
3. If your Hyundai is equipped with a ture is low and the engine is
manual transmission, place the shift cold:
lever in neutral and depress the Start the engine while depress-
clutch pedal fully. If your Hyundai ing the accelerator pedal. If the
has an automatic transmission, atmospheric temperature is very
C050B01HP
place the shift lever in "P" (park). low, setting the ignition switch to
4. On vehicles equipped with the die- NOTE: "ON" for one or two seconds
sel preheat indication lamp, turn the If the engine were not started within before attempting to start the
ignition key to the "ON" position. 2 seconds after the preheating is engine will make it easier to
The diesel-preheat indicator lamp completed, turn the ignition key start.
will first illuminate in amber, and once more to the "LOCK" position
then after a short time, the amber during 10 seconds, and then to the 6. Turn the ignition key to the "START"
illumination will go off, indicating "ON" position, in order to preheat position and release it when the
that preheating is completed. again. engine starts.
5. Operate the accelerator pedal as

described below in accordance with
the atmospheric temperature and/
or engine condition. (Diesel Engine
(2.5 TCI) Only)
2
OPERATING THE MANUAL
TRANSMISSION 7
C055B02HP-GAT C070A02HP-GAT
Driving Condition Required Idle Time
STARTING AND STOPPING THE
Normal driving Not necessary
ENGINE FOR TURBO CHARGER
INTERCOOLER (Diesel Engine) High speed Up to 80 km/h About 20 seconds
driving Up to 100km/h About 1 minute
(1) Do not race or suddenly accelerate
the engine immediately after start- Steep mountain slopes or
ing it. If the engine is cold, allow the continued driving in ex- About 2 minutes
engine to idle for several seconds cess of 100km/h
before it is driven to ensure suffi-
cient lubrication of the turbo charger
unit.
(2) After high speed driving or pro- HHP3017
longed engine loading, the engine ! WARNING: Your Hyundai's manual transmission
should be allowed to idle, as shown has a conventional shift pattern. This
in the following chart, before turn- Do not turn the engine off immedi-
ately after it has been subjected to shift pattern is imprinted on the shift
ing it off. knob. The transmission is fully syn-
This idle time will allow the turbo a heavy load. Doing so may cause
severe damage to the engine or chronized in all forward gears so shift-
charger to cool prior to shutting the ing to either a higher or a lower gear is
engine off. turbo charger unit.
easily accomplished.
NOTE:
o To shift into reverse, rest the le-
ver in neutral for at least 3 sec-
onds after your car is completely
stopped. Then move the lever
into the reverse position.
8
o During cold weather, shifting may C070B01A-AAT C070D02O-AAT
be difficult until the transmis- Using the Clutch Good Driving Practices
sion lubricant has warmed up. The clutch should be pressed all the o Never take the car out of gear and
This is normal and not harmful to way to the floor before shifting, then coast down a hill. This is extremely
the transmission. released slowly. The clutch pedal hazardous. Always leave the car in
o If you 've come to a complete should always be used after fully re- gear.
stop and it's hard to shift into 1st turning to the original position. Do not o Don't "ride" the brakes. This can
or R(Reverse), put the shift lever rest your foot on the clutch pedal while cause them to overheat and mal-
in N(Neutral) position and release driving. This can cause unnecessary function. Instead, when you are driv-
the clutch. Press the clutch pedal wear. Do not partially engage the clutch ing down a long hill, slow down and
back down, and then shift into to hold the car on an incline. This shift to a lower gear. When you do
1st or R(Reverse) gear position. causes unnecessary wear. Use the this, engine braking will help slow
o Do not use the shift lever as a parking brake to hold the car on an the car.
handrest during driving, as this incline. Do not operate the clutch pedal o Slow down before shifting to a lower
can result in premature wear of rapidly and repeatedly. gear. This will help avoid over-rev-
the transmission shift forks. ving the engine, which can cause
C070E03A-GAT
damage.
o Slow down when you encounter
! CAUTION:
RECOMMENDED SHIFT POINTS
cross winds. This gives you much
When downshifting from fifth gear Shift better control of your car.
Recommended
to fourth gear, caution should be from-to o Be sure the car is completely stopped
taken not to inadvertently press the 1-2 20 km/h (15 mph) before you attempt to shift into re-
gear shift lever sideways in such a verse. The transmission can be
2-3 40 km/h (25 mph) damaged if you do not. To shift into
manner that second gear is en-
gaged. Such a drastic downshift 3-4 55 km/h (35 mph) reverse, depress the clutch, move
may cause the engine speed to in- 4-5 75 km/h (45 mph) the shift lever to neutral, wait three
crease to the point that the tachom- seconds, then shift to the reverse
The shift points as shown above are position.
eter will enter the red-zone. Such
recommended for optimum fuel
over-revving of the engine may
economy and performance.
possibly cause engine damage.
2
AUTOMATIC TRANSMIS- 9
SION
o Exercise extreme caution when driv- C090A01HP-GAT
ing on a slippery surface. Be espe- o In the event your vehicle leaves (If Installed)
cially careful when braking, acceler- the roadway, do not steer sharply.
ating or shifting gears. On a slippery Instead, slow down before pull-
surface, an abrupt change in ve- ing back into the travel lanes.
hicle speed can cause the drive o Never exceed posted speed lim-
wheels to lose traction and the ve- its.
hicle to go out of control.
! WARNING:
o Avoid high cornering speeds.
HHP3018
o Do not make quick steering wheel
movements, such as sharp lane The highly efficient Hyundai automatic
changes or fast, sharp turns. transmission has four forward speeds
o Always wear your seat belts. and one reverse speed. It has a con-
In a collision crash, an unbelted ventional shift pattern as shown in the
person is significantly more likely illustration.
to die than a person wearing a At night, with headlights switched on,
seatbelt. the appropriate symbol on the quad-
o The risk of rollover is greatly in- rant will be illuminated according to the
creased if you lose control of range selected.
your vehicle at highway speeds.
o Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off the
roadway and the driver oversteers
to reenter the roadway.
10
C090B01HP-GAT C090D01HP-GAT
The function of each position is o N (Neutral):
! CAUTION: as follows: In the "N" position, the transmission is
Never shift into "R" or "P" position in neutral, which means that no gears
while the vehicle is moving. o P (Park): are engaged. The engine can be started
Use to hold the vehicle in place when with the shift lever in "N" position,
parked or while starting the engine. although this is not recommended ex-
NOTE: Whenever parking the car, apply the cept if the engine stalls while the car is
Depress the brake pedal and parking brake and shift the selector moving.
push the button when shifting. lever to the "P" (Park) position.
Push the button when shifting.
The selector lever can be C090E01HP-GAT
shifted freely. ! CAUTION:
o D (Drive):
For optimum fuel economy, acceler- Never place the selector lever in the Use for normal driving. The transmis-
ate gradually. The transmission will "P" (Park) position unless the ve- sion will automatically shift through a
automatically shift to the second, third hicle is fully stopped. four-gear sequence, giving best
and overdrive gears. Failure to observe this caution will economy and power. Never down-shift
cause severe damage to the trans- manually to "2" position or "L" position
mission. when vehicle speed is more than 96
km/h (60 mph).
C090C01A-AAT
o R (Reverse):
Use for backing up the vehicle. Bring
the car to a complete stop before
shifting the selector lever to "R" posi-
tion.
2
11
C090G01HP-GAT
C090F01A-AAT
NOTE:
o 2 (Second gear): o L (Low gear): o For smooth operation, depress
Use for driving on slippery road hill Use for driving up a very steep grade or the brake pedal when shifting
climbing or engine braking downhill. for engine braking when descending from NEUTRAL or PARK to a for-
"2" automatically shifts between 1st steep hills. When downshifting to "L", ward or reverse gear.
and 2nd gears. the transmission will temporarily re- o The ignition key must be in the
This means that no shift-up to 3rd gear main in second gear until the vehicle "ON" position and the brake pedal
is performed. However, the shift-up to has slowed enough for low gear to fully depressed in order to move
3rd gear is done when the car speed engage. Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 the shift lever from the "P" (Park)
exceeds a certain value to prevent the mph) in low gear. position to any of the other posi-
engine from over-running. "L" engages 1st gear only. However, tions.
Manually move the selector to "D" shift-up to 2nd is performed when the o It is always possible to shift from
returning to normal driving condition. vehicle exceeds a certain speed, and "R", "N", "D", "2", "L" positions
as the speed increases, shift-up to 3rd to "P" position. However, the
gear occurs to prevent over-running vehicle must be fully stopped to
the engine. avoid transmission damage.
C090H02HP-DAT C090I01HP-GAT
! CAUTION: ! CAUTION:
o P (Park): o Shift into "R" and "P" position
Use this range to park the vehicle. only when the vehicle has com-
This range is also used when en- pletely stopped.
gine is started and warmed up. o Do not accelerate the engine in
the reverse or any of the forward
o N (Neutral): positions with the brakes applied.
The engine can be started in this o Always apply the footbrake when
range, but the use of "P" range is shifting from "P" or "N" to "R",
recommended for safer start up. "D", "2" or "L" position.
12
C090J01HP-DAT If you need to accelerate rapidly, press

o Do not use the P(Park) position in OVERDRIVE SWITCH the accelerator pedal all the way to the
place of the parking brake. Always
floor. The transmission will automati-
set the parking brake, shift the
cally shift to a lower gear, depending
transmission into P(Park) and turn
on the speed.
off the ignition when you leave the
vehicle, even momentarily.
Never leave the vehicle unattended NOTE:
while the engine is running. Turn the overdrive switch on for
o When accelerating from a stop on good fuel economy and smooth
a steep hill, the vehicle may have driving. If engine braking is needed
a tendency to roll backwards. Shift- in the "D" range or if repeated up-
ing the shift lever into 2nd gear shifting and downshifting between
will help prevent the vehicle from HHP3019
the 3rd and 4th gear is needed when
rolling backwards. climbing a gentle slope, it is recom-
When the overdrive switch is turned mended that the overdrive switch
o Check the automatic transmission on, the transmission will automatically
fluid level regularly, and add fluid be turned off. Turn the overdrive
upshift to the second, third and over- switch back on immediately after-
as necessary. drive gears. When the overdrive switch ward.
is turned off, the transmission will not
upshift to the overdrive gear at all.
For normal driving, the selector lever
should be left in the "D" position and
the overdrive switch turned on.
2
13
C090N04A-AAT o Exercise extreme caution when driv-

Good Driving Practices o Always wear your seat belts.
ing on a slippery surface. Be espe-
In a collision crash, an unbelted
o Never move the gear selector lever cially careful when braking, acceler-
person is significantly more likely
from "P" or "N" to any other position ating or shifting gears. On a slippery
to die than a person wearing a
with the accelerator pedal de- surface, an abrupt change in ve-
seat belt.
pressed. hicle speed can cause the drive
o The risk of rollover is greatly in-
o Never move the gear selector lever wheels to lose traction and the ve-
creased if you lose control of
into "P" when the vehicle is in mo- hicle to go out of control.
your vehicle at highway speeds.
tion. o Turn the overdrive switch on for
o Loss of control often occurs if
o Be sure the car is completely stopped good fuel economy and smooth driv-
two or more wheels drop off the
before you attempt to shift into "R". ing. If engine braking is needed in
roadway and the driver oversteers
o Never take the car out of gear and the "D" range or if repeated upshift-
to reenter the roadway.
coast down a hill. This may be ex- ing and downshifting between 3rd
o In the event your vehicle leaves
tremely hazardous. Always leave and 4th gear is needed when climb-
the roadway, do not steer sharply.
the car in gear when moving. ing a gentle slope, it is recommended
Instead, slow down before pull-
o Do not "ride" the brakes. This can that the overdrive switch be turned
ing back into the travel lanes.
cause them to overheat and mal- off. Turn the overdrive switch back
o Never exceed posted speed lim-
function. Instead, when you are driv- on immediately afterward.
its.
ing down a long hill, slow down and o Optimum vehicle performance and
o If your vehicle becomes stuck in
shift to a lower gear. When you do economy is obtained by smoothly
snow, mud, sand, etc., then you
this, engine braking will help slow depressing and releasing the accel-
may attempt to rock the vehicle
the car. erator pedal.
free by moving it forward and back-
o Slow down before shifting to a lower ward. Do not attempt this proce-
gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may
not be engaged. ! WARNING:
dure if people or objects are any-
where near the vehicle. During the
o Always use the parking brake. Do o Avoid high cornering speeds. rocking operation the vehicle may
not depend on placing the transmis- o Do not make quick steering wheel suddenly move forward of back-
sion in "P" to keep the car from movements, such as sharp lane ward as it becomes unstuck, caus-
moving. changes or fast, sharp turns. ing injury or damage to nearby
people or objects.
14 FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD)
D090A01P-GAT C350A01HP-GAT
4L(Low range 4-wheel drive)
You can send your engine power to all Part-time 4WD operation
Use "4L" for climbing or descending
front and rear wheels for maximum
steep hills, off-road driving, and towing
power. 4WD is useful when you drive
the vehicle. Especially when increased
in snow, mud, ice, mountainous or
drive power is required.
sandy areas where good traction is
The 4WD LOW indicator light ( ) will
required, or when your wheels lose
be turned on to remind you that you are
traction using two-wheel drive.
in the 4L mode.
! CAUTION:
HHP2113
Do not select 4WD (4H or 4L) mode
on dry paved roads. Especially on
1. Knob position dry highway, never select the 4WD
This is used to set different positions. mode.
Four-wheel driving on dry paved
2H(Rear-wheel drive) roads for a long period will increase
the fuel consumption with possible
When driving on normal roads and noise generation and early tire wear.
highway. In addition, axle gear oil tempera-
ture increases with possible driv-
4H(High range 4-wheel drive) ing system part wear.
When driving off-road, wet or snow-
covered roads with normal speed.
The 4WD HIGH indicator light ( )
will be turned on to remind you that you
are in the 4H mode.
2
15
2. Transfer shift knob operation 4H → 4L

D090E02HP-GAT
Driving Four-wheel drive safely
By turning the transfer shift knob(4H,
4L), both axles of the vehicle are rigidly 1. Stop the vehicle. o The driving posture should be more
connected with each other. This im- 2. Depress the clutch pedal (Manual upright and closer to the wheel than
proves the traction characteristics. Transmission) or put the shift lever usual; adjust the seat to a good
into "N (neutral)" position (Automatic position for easy steering and pedal
2H → 4H Transmission). operation.
3. Select the 4L mode. o Be sure to wear the seat belt.
Turn the transfer shift knob from the o Drive carefully when off the road
2H mode to the 4H mode at speed 4L → 4H and avoid dangerous areas.
below 80 km/h. It is not necessary to o 4WD has higher ground clearance
depress the clutch pedal (Manual 1. Stop the vehicle. and a narrower track to make them
Transmission) or put the shift lever into 2. Depress the clutch pedal (Manual capable of performing in a wide
"N(neutral)" position (Automatic Trans- Transmission) or put the shift lever variety of off road applications. Spe-
mission). Perform this operation when into "N (neutral)" position (Automatic cific design characteristics give them
driving straight. Transmission). a higher center of gravity than ordi-
3. Select the 4H mode. nary cars. An advantage of the
4H → 2H higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road allowing you to
Turn the transfer shift knob from the anticipate problems. They are not
4H mode to the 2H mode at speed designed for cornering at the same
below 80 km/h. It is not necessary to speeds as conventional 2-wheel
depress the clutch pedal (Manual drive vehicles any more than low-
Transmission) or put the shift lever into slung sports cars are designed to
"N(neutral)" position (Automatic Trans- perform satisfactorily under off-road
mission). Perform this operation when conditions. If at all possible, avoid
driving straight. sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
16
As with other vehicles of this type, Driving on dry paved road and Driving in Water
failure to operate this vehicle cor- highway
rectly may result in loss of control or
vehicle rollover. Select 2H(2WD) to drive on dry paved
o Do not grip the inside or spokes of roads. Especially on dry highway, never
the steering wheel when driving off- select the 4H or 4L(4WD).
road. The steering wheel could jerk
and injure your hands. Always firmly Driving on snowy or icy roads
hold the outer steering wheel when Select the 4H or 4L in accordance with
you are driving off-road. the road conditions, and then gradu-
o Drive at lower speeds in strong 40cm
ally depress the accelerator pedal for a
crosswinds. Because of your smooth start.
vehicle's high center of gravity, its
D090E01HP
stability will be affected in cross- Driving on sandy or muddy roads
winds. Slower speeds ensure better Select the 4L mode and drive through
vehicle control. Select the 4H or 4L and then gradually slowly.
o Check your brake condition once depress the accelerator pedal for a The maximum advisable wading depth
you are out of mud or water. Press smooth start. Keep the pressure on is approximately 40cm (15.7 in.).
the brake several times as you move the accelerator pedal constant as pos- Before driving through water, such as
slowly until your feel normal braking sible, and drive at low speed. when crossing shallow streams, first
forces return. check the depth of the water and the
o Four-wheel driving on flat and nor- Climbing sharp grades bottom of the river bed for firmness.
mal roads can result in a severe Drive slowly at the speed of 5 km/h
Select the 4L to maximize use the (3mph) and avoid deep water.
binding condition when turning the
engine torque. Take all necessary safety measures to
steering wheel.
ensure that water damage to the en-
Descending sharp grades gine or other vehicle parts does not
Select 4L, use the engine brake and occur.
descend slowly.
2
17
Water entering the engine air intake C355A04HP-GAT

LOW Mode
will cause severe engine damage. Full-time 4WD operation
Water can wash the grease from wheel (If Installed) Full power to both axles, including a
bearings, causing rusting and prema- lower gear ratio for low-speed applica-
ture failure, and may also enter the tions that require extra power such as
axles, transmission and transfer case, dry road surfaces, wet pavement,
reducing the gear oil's lubricating quali- snow-covered roads and/or off-road.
ties. Especially when increased drive power
is required.
"LOW" mode is not recommended on
dry pavement.
The 4WD LOW indicator light ( ) will
be turned on to remind you that you are
in the LOW mode.
HHP2114
1. Knob position 2. Transfer shift knob operation

This is used to set different positions. AUTO → LOW
AUTO Mode 1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Depress the clutch pedal (Manual
Full power delivered to front and rear
Transmission) or put the shift lever
axles for increase traction. Use this
into "N(neutral)" position (Automatic
mode for normal on-road operating
Transmission)
conditions such as dry road surfaces,
3. Turn the transfer shift knob to "LOW"
wet pavement, snow-covered roads
mode.
and/or off-road.
18
LOW → AUTO When driving on a snow-covered

road or a slippery, muddy surface, ure or rollover and serious injury.
make sure that you keep a suffi- When replacing the tires, be sure to
1. Stop the vehicle. equip all four tires with the tire and
2. Depress the clutch pedal (Manual cient distance between your ve-
hicle and the one ahead of you. wheel of the same size, type, tread,
Transmission) or put the shift lever brand and load-carrying capacity.
into "N (neutral)" position (Automatic (6) Since the driving torque is always
applied to the 4 wheels, the perfor- If you nevertheless decide to equip
Transmission). your vehicle with any tire/wheel
3. Turn the transfer shift knob to mance of the full-time 4WD vehicle
is greatly affected by the condition combination not recommended by
"AUTO" mode. Hyundai for off-road driving, you
of the tires. Be sure to equip it with
all four tires of the same size and should not use these tires for high-
Driving 4WD Safely way driving.
type.
(1) Be sure to wear the seat belt. o When replacement of any of the
(2) Drive at lower speeds in strong tires or disc wheels is neces-
crosswinds. Because of your sary, replace all of them. (7)The full-time 4WD vehicle can-
vehicle's high center of gravity, its o Rotate the tires and check the not be towed by an ordinary tow
stability will be affected in cross- tire pressure at regular inter- truck. Make sure that the vehicle
winds. Slower speeds ensure bet- vals. is towed with its four wheels
ter vehicle control. raised off the ground.
(3) Check the brake condition after
driving in wet or muddy conditions. ! WARNING: o If the vehicle is towed with its
Press the brake several times as only two wheels raised off the
Your vehicle is equipped with tires
you move slowly until you feel nor- ground, the 4WD system could
designed to provide for safe ride
mal braking forces return. be damaged.
and handling capability.
(4) Do not drive the vehicle through o In unavoidable case, if the ve-
Do not use a size and type of tire
water. (i.e. streams, rivers, lakes, hicle is being towed with all four
and wheel that is different from the
etc.) wheels on the ground, it should
one that was originally installed on
(5) The stopping distance of the full- be towed only forward direction
your vehicle. It can affect the safety
time 4WD vehicle differs very little with rope.
and performance of your vehicle,
from that of the 2WD vehicle. which could lead to handling fail-
2
19
o While towing, check the follow-

ing items.
1. The ignition switch is in "ACC"
! WARNING:
or "ON". Keep away from the front of the
2. Place the shift lever in neutral vehicle while inspecting. This is
(For Automatic Transmission, very dangerous as the vehicle can
"N" position). jump forward and cause serious
3. Release the parking brake. injury or death.
Temporary
NOTE: free roller Roll tester (Speedometer)
(9) When using tire chains, be sure to
To avoid serious damage to your
HHP1034 install the chains on all wheels.
4WD vehicle, limit towing to 15km/
(10)If the front or rear wheels get stuck
h (10 mph) and not for more than o In rare cases when it's unavoidable
in the mud, do not spin them reck-
1.5km (1 mile) at ANY TIME. that a 4WD vehicle is to be in-
lessly. The 4WD system could be
spected for speedometer test on
damaged.
(8) For speedometer test or inspec- 2WD roll tester, strictly follow the
tion/maintenance (I/M) program of procedures next.
full-time 4WD vehicle, use a four- Driving on dry paved road and
wheel chassis dynamometer. 1. Check the tire pressures recom- highway
mended for your vehicle. Select the AUTO to drive on dry paved
2. Place the rear wheels on the roll roads. Especially on dry highway, never
! CAUTION: tester for speedometer test as select the LOW.
Never engage the parking brake shown in the illustration.
while performing these tests. 3. Release the parking brake. Driving on snowy or icy roads
4. Place the front wheels on the
temporary free roller as shown in Select the AUTO or LOW in accor-
the illustration. dance with the road conditions, and
then gradually depress the accelerator
pedal for a smooth start.
20
Driving on sandy or muddy roads Driving in Water Water can wash the grease from wheel
bearings, causing rusting and prema-
Select the LOW and then gradually ture failure, and may also enter the
depress the accelerator pedal for a axles, transmission and transfer case,
smooth start. Keep the pressure on reducing the gear oil's lubricating quali-
the accelerator pedal constant as pos- ties.
sible, and drive at low speed.
Climbing sharp grades

Select the LOW to maximize use the
! CAUTION:
engine torque. 40cm o While the full-time 4WD vehicle
is being raised on a jack, never
start the engine or cause the tires
Descending sharp grades D090E01HP to rotate.
Select the LOW, use the engine brake Select the LOW mode and drive There is the danger that rotating
and descend slowly. through slowly. tires touching the ground could
The maximum advisable wading depth cause the vehicle to go off the
is approximately 40cm (15.7 in.). jack and to jump forward.
Before driving through water, such as o If one of the front or rear wheels
when crossing shallow streams, first begins to spin in mud, snow,
check the depth of the water and the etc., the vehicle can sometimes
bottom of the river bed for firmness. be driven out by depressing the
Drive slowly at the speed of 5 km/h accelerator pedal further; how-
(3mph) and avoid deep water. ever, avoid running the engine
Take all necessary safety measures to continuously at high rpm be-
ensure that water damage to the en- cause doing so could damage
gine or other vehicle parts does not the 4WD system.
occur.
Water entering the engine air intake
will cause severe engine damage.
2
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM 21
(ABS)
C120A02A-AAT
(If Installed)
! WARNING:
! WARNING:
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is
o Avoid high cornering speeds. designed to prevent wheel lock-up ABS will not prevent accidents due
o Do not make quick steering wheel during sudden braking or on hazard- to improper or dangerous driving
movements, such as sharp lane ous road surfaces. The ABS control maneuvers. Even though vehicle
charges or fast, sharp turns. module monitors the wheel speed and control is improved during emer-
o The risk of rollover is greatly in- controls the pressure applied to each gency braking, always maintain a
creased if you lose control of brake. Thus, in emergency situations safe distance between you and ob-
your vehicle at highway speeds. or on slick roads, ABS will increase jects ahead. Vehicle speeds should
o In a collision crash, an unbelted vehicle control during braking. always be reduced during extreme
person is significantly more likely road conditions.
to die than a person wear a NOTE: The braking distance for cars
seatbelt. equipped with an anti-lock braking
During ABS operation, a slight pul-
o Loss of control often occurs if system may be longer than for those
sation may be felt in the brake pedal
two or more wheels drop off the without it in the following road con-
when the brakes are applied. Also,
roadway and the driver oversteers ditions. During these conditions the
a noise may be heard in the engine
to reenter the roadway. vehicle should be driven at reduced
compartment while braking. These
o In the event your vehicle leaves speeds.
conditions are normal and indicate
the roadway, do not steer sharply. that the anti-lock brake system is o Rough, gravel or snow-covered
Instead, slow down before pull- functioning properly. roads.
ing back into the travel lanes. o With tire chains installed.
o Roads where the road surface is
pitted or has different surface
height.
The safety features of an ABS
equipped vehicle should not be
tested by high speed driving or
cornering. This could endanger the
safety of yourself or others.
22 LIMITED-SLIP DIFFEREN- GOOD BRAKING PRAC-
TIAL (LSD) TICES
D190A01HP-GAT C130A01HP-GAT
(If Installed)
! CAUTION: !
A limited-slip differential, if equipped,
o Never start the engine with the WARNING:
is for the rear wheel differential only.
gearshift lever placed in the for- Nothing should be carried on top of
The features of this limited-slip differ-
ward or reverse while one of the the cargo area cover behind the
ential are described below:
rear wheels is jacked up and the rear seat. If there were an accident
Just as with a conventional differential,
other in contact with the ground; or a sudden stop, such objects
the wheel on one side is allowed to turn
doing so may cause the vehicle could move forward and cause dam-
at a different speed from the wheel on
to jump forward. age to the vehicle or injure the oc-
the other side when the vehicle is
o Use only recommended oil for cupants.
cornering. The difference between the
limited-slip differential and a conven- LSD in the rear axle.
tional differential is that if the wheel on See page 9-5 for the recom- o After being parked, check to be sure
one side of the vehicle loses traction, a mended oil descriptions. the parking brake is not engaged
greater amount of torque is applied to and that the parking brake indicator
the rear wheel on the other side to light is out before driving away.
improve traction. o Driving through water may get the
brakes wet. They can also get wet
when the car is washed. Wet brakes
can be dangerous! Your car will not
stop as quickly if the brakes are wet.
Wet brakes cause the car to pull to
one side. To dry the brakes, apply
the brakes lightly until the braking
action returns to normal, taking care
to keep the car under control at all
times. If the braking action does not
return to normal, stop as soon as it
is safe to do so and call your Hyundai
dealer for assistance.
2
DRIVING FOR ECONOMY 23
o Don't coast down hills with the car the gear selector lever in "P" (auto- C140A02A-AAT
out of gear. This is extremely haz- matic transmission) or in first or You can save fuel and get more miles
ardous. Keep the car in gear at all reverse gear (manual transmission). from your car if you follow these sug-
times, use the brakes to slow down, If your car is facing downhill, turn the gestions:
then shift to a lower gear so that front wheels into the curb to help
engine braking will help you main- keep the car from rolling. If your car o Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a
tain a safe speed. is facing uphill, turn the front wheels moderate rate. Don't make "jack-
o Don't "ride" the brake pedal. Rest- away from the curb to help keep the rabbit" starts or full-throttle shifts
ing your foot on the brake pedal car from rolling. If there is no curb or and maintain a steady cruising
while driving can be dangerous be- if it is required by other conditions to speed. Don't race between stop-
cause it can result in the brakes keep the car from rolling, block the lights. Try to adjust your speed to
overheating and losing their effec- wheels. that of the other traffic so you don't
tiveness. o Under some conditions your park- have to change speeds unneces-
It also increases the wear of the ing brake can freeze in the engaged sarily. Avoid heavy traffic whenever
brake components. position. This is most likely to hap- possible. Always maintain a safe
o If a tire goes flat while you are pen when there is an accumulation distance from other vehicles so you
driving, apply the brakes gently and of snow or ice around or near the can avoid unnecessary braking. This
keep the car pointed straight ahead rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. also reduces brake wear.
while you slow down. When you are If there is a risk that the parking o Drive at a moderate speed. The
moving slowly enough for it to be brake may freeze, apply it only tem- faster you drive, the more fuel your
safe to do so, pull off the road and porarily while you put the gear se- car uses. Driving at a moderate
stop in a safe place. lector lever in "P" (automatic) or in speed, especially on the highway, is
o If your car is equipped with an auto- first or reverse gear (manual trans- one of the most effective ways to
matic transmission, don't let your mission) and block the rear wheels reduce fuel consumption.
car creep forward. To avoid creep- so the car cannot roll. Then release
ing forward, keep your foot firmly on the parking brake.
the brake pedal when the car is o Do not hold the vehicle on the up-
stopped. grade with the accelerator pedal.
o Use caution when parking on a hill. This can cause the transmission to
Engage the parking brake and place overheat. Always use the brake
pedal or parking brake.
24
o Don't "ride" the brake or clutch pedal. o Keep your car in good condition. For o Remember, your Hyundai does not
This can increase fuel consumption better fuel economy and reduced require extended warm-up. After the
and also increase wear on these maintenance costs, maintain your engine has started, allow the engine
components. In addition, driving with car in accordance with the mainte- to run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to
your foot resting on the brake pedal nance schedule in Section 5. If you placing the vehicle in gear. In very
may cause the brakes to overheat, drive your car in severe conditions, cold weather, however, give your
which reduces their effectiveness more frequent maintenance is re- engine a slightly longer warm-up pe-
and may lead to more serious con- quired (see Section 5 for details). riod.
sequences. o Keep your car clean. For maximum o Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine.
o Take care of your tires. Keep them service, your Hyundai should be Lugging is driving too slowly in too
inflated to the recommended pres- kept clean and free of corrosive high a gear resulting in the engine
sure. Incorrect inflation, either too materials. It is especially important bucking. If this happens, shift to a
much or too little, results in unnec- that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be al- lower gear. Over-revving is racing
essary tire wear. Check the tire pres- lowed to accumulate on the under- the engine beyond its safe limit.
sures at least once a month. side of the car. This extra weight This can be avoided by shifting at
o Be sure that the wheels are aligned can result in increased fuel con- the recommended speeds.
correctly. Improper alignment can sumption and also contribute to cor- o Use your air conditioning sparingly.
result from hitting curbs or driving rosion. The air conditioning system is oper-
too fast over irregular surfaces. Poor o Travel lightly. Don't carry unneces- ated by engine power so your fuel
alignment causes faster tire wear sary weight in your car. Weight re- economy is reduced when you use
and may also result in other prob- duces fuel economy. it.
lems as well as greater fuel con- o Don't let the engine idle longer than
sumption. necessary. If you are waiting (and
not in traffic), turn off your engine
and restart only when you're ready
to go.
2
SMOOTH CORNERING WINTER DRIVING 25
C150A01A-AAT C160A01A-AAT During deceleration, use engine brak-

Avoid braking or gear changing in cor- The more severe weather conditions ing to the fullest extent. Sudden brake
ners, especially when roads are wet. of winter result in greater wear and applications on snowy or icy roads
Ideally, corners should always be taken other problems. To minimize the prob- may cause skids to occur. You need to
under gentle acceleration. If you follow lems of winter driving, you should fol- keep sufficient distance between the
these suggestions, tire wear will be low these suggestions: vehicle in operation in front and your
held to a minimum. vehicle. Also, apply the brake gently. It
should be noted that installing tire
chains on the tire will provide a greater
C160B01A-GAT driving force, but will not prevent side
Snowy or Icy Conditions skids.
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it
may be necessary to use snow tires or NOTE:
to install tire chains on your tires. If Tire chains are not legal in all prov-
snow tires are needed, it is necessary inces. Check province laws before
to select tires equivalent in size and fitting tire chains.
type of the original equipment tires.
Failure to do so may adversely affect
the safety and handling of your car.
Furthermore, speeding, rapid accel-
eration, sudden brake applications, and
sharp turns are potentially very haz-
ardous practices.
26
C160C01A-AAT C160D01A-AAT C160F01A-AAT

Use High Quality Ethylene Gly- Check Battery and Cables Check Spark Plugs and Ignition
col Coolant Winter puts additional burdens on the System
Your Hyundai is delivered with high battery system. Visually inspect the Inspect your spark plugs as described
quality ethylene glycol coolant in the battery and cables as described in in Section 6 and replace them if neces-
cooling system. It is the only type of Section 6. The level of charge in your sary. Also check all ignition wiring and
coolant that should be used because it battery can be checked by your Hyundai components to be sure they are not
helps prevent corrosion in the cooling dealer or a service station. cracked, worn or damaged in any way.
system, lubricates the water pump and
prevents freezing. Be sure to replace
C160E01A-AAT C160G02A-GAT
or replenish your coolant in accor-
dance with the maintenance schedule Change to "Winter Weight" Oil if To Keep Locks from Freezing
in Section 5. Before winter, have your Necessary To keep the locks from freezing, squirt
coolant tested to assure that its freez- In some climates it is recommended an approved de-icer fluid or glycerine
ing point is sufficient for the tempera- that a lower viscosity "winter weight" into the key opening. If a lock is cov-
tures anticipated during the winter. oil be used during cold weather. See ered with ice, squirt it with an approved
Section 9 for recommendations. If you de-icing fluid to remove the ice. If the
aren't sure what weight oil you should lock is frozen internally, you may be
use, consult your Hyundai dealer. able to thaw it out by using a heated
key. Handle the heated key with care
to avoid injury.
NOTE:
The proper temperature for using
the immobilizer key is from -40°C
(-40°F) to 80°C (176°F). If you heat
the immobilizer key over 80°C
(176°F) to open the frozen lock, it
may cause damage to the transpon-
der in its head.
2
HIGHER SPEED MOTORING 27
C160H01A-AAT C160J01A-AAT C170A01A-AAT

Use Approved Anti-Freeze in Don't Let Ice and Snow Accumu- Pre-Trip Inspections
Window Washer System late Underneath 1. Tires:
To keep the water in the window washer Under some conditions, snow and ice
Adjust the tire inflation pressures to
system from freezing, add an approved can build up under the fenders and
specification. Low tire inflation pres-
anti-freeze solution in accordance with interfere with the steering. When driv- sures will result in overheating and
instructions on the container. Window ing in severe winter conditions where
possible failure of the tires.
washer anti-freeze is available from this may happen, you should periodi-
Avoid using worn or damaged tires
Hyundai dealers and most auto parts cally check underneath the car to be which may result in reduced traction or
outlets. Do not use engine coolant or sure the movement of the front wheels
tire failure.
other types of anti-freeze as these and the steering components is not
may damage the finish. obstructed.
NOTE:
Never exceed the maximum tire in-
C160I01HP-GAT
flation pressure shown on the tires.
C160K01A-AAT
Don't Let Your Parking Brake
Carry Emergency Equipment 2. Fuel, engine coolant and
Freeze
Depending on the severity of the engine oil:
Under some conditions your parking weather where you drive your car, you
brake can freeze in the engaged posi- High speed travel consumes more fuel
should carry appropriate emergency than urban motoring. Do not forget to
tion. This is most likely to happen when equipment. Some of the items you
there is an accumulation of snow or ice check both engine coolant and engine
may want to carry include tire chains, oil.
around or near the rear brakes or if the tow straps or chains, flashlight, emer-
brakes are wet. If there is a risk the gency flares, sand, a shovel, jumper
parking brake may freeze, apply it only 3. Drive belt:
cables, a window scraper, gloves,
temporarily while you put the gear selec- ground cloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc. A loose or damaged drive belt may
tor lever in "P" (automatic) or in first or result in overheating of the engine.
reverse gear (manual transmission) and
block the rear wheels so the car cannot
roll. Then release the parking brake.
28 USE OF LIGHTS TRAILER OR VEHICLE
TOWING
C180A01A-AAT C190A01HP-GAT C190B01S-AAT
Check your lights regularly for correct If you are considering towing with your Trailer Hitches
operation and always keep them clean. car, you should first check with your Select the proper hitch and ball combi-
When driving during the day in condi- Province Department of Motor Vehicles nation, making sure that it's location is
tions of poor visibility, it is helpful to to determine their legal requirements. compatible with that of the trailer or
drive with headlights on low beam. Since laws vary from province to prov- vehicle being towed.
This enables you to be seen, as well as ince the requirements for towing trail- Use a quality non-equalizing hitch which
to see. ers, cars, or other types of vehicles or distributes the tongue load uniformly
apparatus may differ. Ask your Hyundai throughout the chassis.
dealer for further details before towing.
The hitch should be bolted securely to
the car and installed by a qualified
! CAUTION: technician. DO NOT USE A HITCH
DESIGNED FOR TEMPORARY IN-
Do not do any towing with your car
STALLATION AND NEVER USE ONE
during its first 2,000 km (1,200 miles)
THAT ATTACHES ONLY TO THE
in order to allow the engine to prop-
BUMPER.
erly break in. Failure to heed this
caution may result in serious en-
gine or transmission damage.
2
29
C190C03S-GAT C190E03HP-GAT
Trailer Brakes stop as soon as it is safe to do so, Trailer Weight Limit
and allow the engine to idle until it
If your trailer is equipped with a braking cools down. You may proceed
system, make sure it conforms to fed- once the engine has cooled suffi-
eral and/or local regulations and that it ciently.
is properly installed and operating cor-
rectly.
NOTE:
If you tow a trailer or vehicle, your C190D01A-GAT
car will require more frequent main- Safety Chains
tenance due to the additional load. Tongue load Total trailer weight
Should the hitch connection between
See "Maintenance Under Severe C190E01L
your car and the trailer or vehicle you
Usage Conditions" on page 5-8.
are towing fail, the trailer or vehicle Tongue loads can be increased or
could wander dangerously across other decreased by re-distributing the load
lanes of traffic and ultimately collide in the trailer.
! CAUTION: with another vehicle. To eliminate this This can be verified by checking the
potentially dangerous situation, safety total weight of the loaded trailer and
o Never connect a trailer brake sys-
chains, attached between your car and then checking the load on the tongue.
tem directly to the vehicle brake
system. the trailer or towed vehicle, are re-
o When towing a trailer on steep quired in most provinces. NOTE:
grades (in excess of 6%) pay close 1. Never load the trailer with more
attention to the engine coolant weight in the back than in the
temperature gauge to ensure the front. About 60% of the trailer
engine does not overheat. If the load should be in the front half
needle of the coolant temperature on the trailer and the remaining
gauge moves across the dial to- 40% in the rear.
wards "H" (HOT), pull over and
30
3. The front or rear axle weight must

not exceed the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) shown on the
vehicle identification plate (see
page 8-2). It is possible that your
towing package does not exceed
the GVWR but exceeds the Coupling point
GAWR. Improper trailer loading
and/or too much luggage in the
Gross axle weight Gross vehicle cargo area can overload the rear
weight axle. Redistribute the load and Spare tire
C190E02L C190E01HP
check the axle weight again.
2. The total gross vehicle weight 4. The maximum permissible static
vertical load on the coupling de-
with trailer must not exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating vice is : ! CAUTION:
(GVWR) shown on the vehicle The following specifications are
identification plate (see page 8- Engine Load recommended when towing a
2). The total gross vehicle weight 2.5 75 kg trailer. The loaded trailer weight
is the combined weight of the cannot safely exceed the values in
2.9, E.C only 112 kg
vehicle, driver, all passengers the following chart.
and their luggage, cargo, hitch, 3.5 Except E.C 75 kg
trailer tongue load and other op-
tional equipment. 5. The maximum permissible over-
hang of the coupling point is
1,135 mm.
2
31
kg.(Lbs) C190F01HP-GAT 7. The vehicle/trailer combination is

Trailer or Vehicle Towing Tips more affected by crosswind and
Maximum Towable Weight
1. Before towing, check hitch and buffeting. When being passed by a
Engine Trailer Tongue large vehicle, keep a constant
safety chain connections as well
2.5 1800(3,968) 75 (165) as proper operation of the trailer speed and steer straight ahead. If
With there is too much wind buffeting
2.9, E.C only 2800(6,173) 112(246) running lights, brake lights, and
Brake turn signals. slow down to get out of the other
3.5 Except E.C 1800(3,968) 75(165)
vehicle's air turbulence.
2. Always drive your vehicle at a mod-
Without erate speed (Less than 100 km/h). 8. When parking your car and trailer,
2.5, 2.9, 3.5 700(1,543) 28(61.7)
Brake 3. Trailer towing requires more fuel especially on a hill, be sure to fol-
than normal conditions. low all the normal precautions. Turn
4. To maintain engine braking effi- your front wheel into the curb, set
ciency, do not tow a trailer with the the parking brake firmly, and put
! WARNING: transmission in fifth gear (manual the transmission in 1st or Reverse
transmission) or an overdrive gear (manual) or Park (automatic). In
o Improperly loading your car and
(automatic transmission). addition, place wheel chocks at
trailer can seriously affect its
5. Always secure items in the trailer each of the trailer's tires.
steering and braking perfor-
to prevent load shift while driving. 9. If the trailer has electric brakes,
mance causing a crash which
6. Check the condition and air pres- start your vehicle and trailer mov-
could cause injury or death.
sure of all tires on the trailer and ing, and then apply the trailer brake
o When a trailer is used, the opera-
your car. Low tire pressure can controller by hand to be sure the
tion speed is restricted to 100km/
seriously affect the handling. Also brakes are working. This lets you
h or less.
check the spare tire. check your electrical connection at
the same time.
10. During your trip, check occasion-
ally to be sure that the load is
secure, and that the lights and
any trailer brakes are still working.
32
11. Avoid jerky starts, sudden accel-

eration or sudden stops.
12. Avoid sharp turns and rapid lane
! CAUTION:
changes. If overheating should occur when
13. Avoid holding the brake pedal down towing, (temperature gauge reads
too long or too frequently. This near red zone), taking the following
could cause the brakes to over- action may reduce or eliminate the
heat, resulting in reduced braking problem.
efficiency.
14. When going down a hill, shift into a 1. Turn off the air conditioner.
lower gear and use the engine brak- 2. Reduce highway speed.
ing effect. When ascending a long 3. Select a lower gear when going
grade, downshift the transmission uphill.
to a lower gear and reduce speed 4. While in stop and go traffic, place
to reduce chances of engine over- the gear selector in park or neu-
loading and/or overheating. tral and idle the engine at a higher
15. If you have to stop while going speed.
uphill, do not hold the vehicle in
place by pressing on the accelera-
tor. This can cause the automatic
transmission to overheat. Use the
parking brake or footbrake.
NOTE:
When towing, check transmission
fluid more frequently.
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
If the Engine Will not Start .......................................... 3-2

Jump Starting .............................................................. 3-3
If the Engine Overheats .............................................. 3-4
Spare Tire .................................................................... 3-5
If You Have a Flat Tire ................................................ 3-7
3
Changing A Flat Tire ................................................... 3-7
If Your Vehicle Must Be Towed ................................. 3-14
Emergency Towing.................................................... 3-15
3
If You Lose Your Keys .............................................. 3-16
3 WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
2 IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START
D010A01A-AAT D010B01HP-GAT D010C02A-EAT

If Engine Doesn’t Turn Over or If Engine Turns Over Normally
! WARNING:
Turns Over Slowly but Does Not Start
If the engine will not start, do not 1. Check fuel level.
push or pull the car to start it. This 2. With the key in the "OFF" position,
could result in a collision or cause check all connectors at ignition coils
other damage. In addition, push or and spark plugs(For Gasoline En-
pull starting may cause the cata- gine) or check all connectors at
lytic converter to be overloaded and glow plug and glow plug relay(For
create a fire hazard. Diesel Engine). Reconnect any that
may be disconnected or loose.
3. Check fuel line in the engine room.
4. If engine still refuses to start, call a
HHP5020
Hyundai dealer or seek other quali-
fied assistance.
1. If your car has an automatic trans-
mission, be sure the gear selector
lever is in "N" or "P" and the emer- D010D01A-AAT
gency brake is set. If Engine Stalls While Driving
2. Check the battery connections to be
sure they are clean and tight. 1. Reduce your speed gradually, keep-
3. Turn on the interior light. If the light ing a straight line. Move cautiously
dims or goes out when you operate off the road to a safe place.
the starter, the battery is discharged. 2. Turn on your emergency flashers.
4. Check the starter connections to be 3. Try to start the engine again. If your
sure they are securely tightened. vehicle will not start, contact a
5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to Hyundai dealer or seek other quali-
start it. See instructions for "Jump fied assistance.
Starting".
3
JUMP STARTING 3
D020A02A-AAT o If you should accidentally get acid 2. Turn off all unnecessary lights and
Discharged on your skin or in your eyes, acces-sories in both vehicles.
battery immediately remove any contami- 3. Attach the clamps of the jumper
nated clothing and flush the area cable in the exact location shown in
with clear water for at least 15 min- the illustration. First, attach one
utes. Then promptly obtain medical clamp of the jumper cable to the
attention. If you must be transported positive (+) post or cable of the
to an emergency facility, continue to discharged battery. Then attach the
apply water to the affected area other end of the same cable to the
with a sponge or cloth. positive (+) post or cable of the
o The gas produced by the battery booster battery. Next, using the
Booster battery during the jump-start operation is other cable, attach one clamp to the
HHP4001
highly explosive. Do not smoke or negative (-) post or cable of the
allow a spark or an open flame in booster battery. Then attach the
! WARNING:
the vicinity. other end of that cable to a solid
o The battery being used to provide metal part of the engine away from
The gas produced by the battery the jump start must be 12-volt. If you the battery. Do not connect the cable
during the jump-start operation is cannot determine that it is a 12-volt to any moving part.
highly explosive. If these instruc- battery, do not attempt to use it for 4. Start the engine in the car with the
tions are not followed exactly, seri- the jump start. booster battery and let it run for a
ous personal injury and damage to o To jump start a car with a discharged few minutes. This will help to as-
the vehicle may occur! If you are battery, follow this procedure ex- sure that the booster battery is fully
not sure how to follow this proce- actly: charged. During the jumping opera-
dure, seek qualified assistance. tion, run the engine in this vehicle at
Automobile batteries contain sul- 1. If the booster battery is installed in about 2000 rpm.
furic acid. This is poisonous and another vehicle, be sure the two
highly corrosive. When jump start- vehicles are not touching.
ing, wear protective glasses and be
careful not to get acid on yourself,
your clothing or on the car.
4 IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS
5. Start the engine in the car with the D030A02HP-AAT 4. Check to see if the water pump drive
discharged battery using the nor- If your temperature gauge indicates belt is missing. If it is not missing,
mal starting procedure. After the overheating, you experience a loss of check to see that it is tight. If the
engine starts, leave the jumper power, or hear loud pinging or knock- drive belt seems to be satisfactory,
cables connected and let the engine ing, the engine is probably too hot. If check for engine coolant leaking
run at fast idle or about 2000 rpm for this happens to you, you should: from the radiator, hoses or under
several minutes. the car. (If the air conditioning had
6. Carefully remove the jumper cables 1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as been in use, it is normal for cold
in the reverse order of attachment. it is safe to do so. water to be draining from it when
2. Place the gear selector lever in "P" you stop).
If you do not know why your battery (automatic), or neutral (manual
became discharged (because the lights transmission) and set the parking
were left on, etc.), have the charging
system checked by your Hyundai
brake. If the air conditioning is on, ! WARNING:
turn it off.
dealer. 3. If engine coolant is running out un- While the engine is running, keep
der the car or steam is coming out hands and clothing away from mov-
from under the hood, stop the en- ing parts such as the fan and drive
gine. Do not open the hood until the belts to prevent injury.
engine coolant has stopped running
or the steaming has stopped. If there
is no visible loss of coolant and no
steam, leave the engine running
and check to be sure the engine
cooling fan is operating. If the fan is
not running, turn the engine off.
3
SPARE TIRE 5
D040A01HP-GAT
! WARNING (Diesel only):

! WARNING:
The following instructions for the FULL
SIZE spare tire should be observed:
Never work on injection system with Do not remove the radiator cap when Check inflation pressure as soon as
engine running or within 30 sec- the engine is hot. This can allow possible after installing the spare tire,
onds after shutting off engine. High coolant to be blown out of the open- and adjust to the specified pressure.
pressure pump, rail, injectors and ing and cause serious burns. The tire pressure should be periodi-
high pressure pipes are subject to cally checked and maintained at the
high pressure even after the engine specified pressure while the tire is
stopped. The fuel jet produced by 6. If you cannot find the cause of the stored.
fuel leaks may cause serious in- overheating, wait until the engine
jury, if it touch the body. People temperature has returned to nor- Spare Tire Pressure
using pacemakers should not move mal. Then, if coolant has been lost,
than 30cm closer to the ECU or carefully add coolant to the reser- Tire Size Full Size
wiring harness within the engine voir (Page 6-12) to bring the fluid Inflation Pressure 200 kPa (29 psi)
room while engine is running, since level in the reservoir up to the half-
the high currents in the Common way mark.
Rail system produce considerable 7. Proceed with caution, keeping alert
magnetic fields. for further signs of overheating. If
overheating happens again, call a
Hyundai dealer for assistance.
5. If the water pump drive belt is bro-
ken or coolant is leaking out, stop
the engine immediately and call the
! CAUTION:
nearest Hyundai dealer for assis- Serious loss of coolant indicates
tance. there is a leak in the cooling system
and this should be checked as soon
as possible by a Hyundai dealer.
6
D040B03HP-GAT 2. Insert the spare wheel rod into the Installation is the reverse order of re-
Handling the Spare Tire hole in the upper pad of the rear moval.
bumper.
3. Connect the wheel nut wrench to
the spare wheel rod. ! CAUTION:
4. Turn the wheel nut wrench counter-
When installing, turn the wheel nut
clockwise and the spare tire will
wrench clockwise till you hear the
lower.
crackle once or twice(Tightening
torque : 3.87 kg.m). And make sure
the spare tire is secured in the
proper location.
HHP4015
1. Obtain the spare wheel rod (Jack
handle) after folding up the seat
cushion of the second seat .
To fold up the seat cushion, refer to
the page 1-25.
HHP4026
5. Remove the lift plate from the cen-

ter of the spare tire after the spare
tire is lowered completely.
HHP4025
3
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE CHANGING A FLAT TIRE 7
D050A01HP-GAT D060A02HP-GAT
If a tire goes flat while you are driving: ! WARNING:

1. Take your foot off the accelerator Your vehicle is equipped with tires
pedal and let the car slow down designed to provide for safe ride
while driving straight ahead. Do not and handling capability.
apply the brakes immediately or at- Do not use a size and type of tire
tempt to pull off the road as this may and wheel that is different from the
cause a loss of control. When the one that was originally installed on
car has slowed to such a speed that your vehicle. It can affect the safety
it is safe to do so, brake carefully and performance of your vehicle,
and pull off the road. Drive off the which could lead to handling fail-
D060A01HP
road as far as possible and park on ure or rollover and serious injury.
firm, level ground. If you are on a The procedure described on the fol- When replacing the tires, be sure to
divided highway, do not park in the lowing pages can be used to rotate equip all four tires with the tire and
median area between the two traffic tires as well as to change a flat tire. wheel of the same size, type, tread,
lanes. When preparing to change a flat tire, brand and load-carrying capacity.
2. When the car is stopped, turn on check to be sure the gear selector If you nevertheless decide to equip
your emergency hazard flashers, lever is in "P" (automatic transmission) your vehicle with any tire/wheel
set the parking brake and put the or reverse gear (manual transmission) combination not recommended by
transmission in "P" (automatic trans- and that the parking brake is set, then: Hyundai for off-road driving, you
mission) or reverse (manual trans- should not use these tires for high-
mission). way driving.
3. Have all passengers get out of the
car. Be sure they all get out on the
side of the car that is away from
traffic.
4. Change the tire according to the
instructions provided as following.
8
D060B01HP-GAT D060C01A-AAT
1. Obtain Spare Tire and Tool 2. Block the Wheel
HHP4011
o Remove the spare tire and take out Flat tire

HHP4015 HHP4022
the jack and tool bag.
o Obtain the spare wheel rod (Jack Block the wheel that is diagonally op-
handle) after folding up the seat posite from the flat tire to keep the
cushion of the second seat .
NOTE: vehicle from rolling when the car is
To fold up the seat cushion, refer to The spare tire is located underneath raised on the jack.
the page 1-25. the car.
3
9
D065C02HP-GAT D060D01A-AAT D060E01A-AAT

3. Removing the Spare Wheel 4. Loosen Wheel Nuts 5. Put the Jack in Place
Cap Front
Pry off the wheel cap, using the bar as
shown in the illustration.
o Alloy Wheel Cap type
HHP4028 HHP4023
The wheel nuts should be loosened Rear

slightly before raising the car. To loosen
the nuts, turn the wrench handle coun-
terclockwise. When doing this, be sure
that the socket is seated completely
HHP4027 over the nut so it cannot slip off. For
maximum leverage, position the
wrench so the handle is to the right as
shown in the illustration. Then, while
holding the wrench near the end of the
handle, pull up on it with steady pres-
HHP4024
sure. Do not remove the nuts at this
time. Just loosen them about one-half The base of the jack should be placed
turn. on firm, level ground. The jack should
be positioned as shown in the illustra-
tion.
10
D060F02HP-GAT
6. Raising the Car
HHP4016 HHP4018
D060F01HP Using the jack handle, turn the release Move the jack handle up and down to
valve clockwise until it reaches a stop. raise the ram until just before the jack
o Open the lid at the left corner of the contacts the jacking point of the car.
luggage compartment. Position the jack with the jack handle.
o Loosen the hexagonal bolt, and then Position it only at the specified points
take out the jack. indicated in the "Put the Jack in Place".
Use of the jack at other points could
damage the car.
Moving the jack handle up and down to
raise the ram.
HHP4017
Then fit the jack handle into the holder,

and align the groove of the jack handle
with the notch of the holder.
3
11
As the jack begins to raise the vehicle, 4) This jack is hydraulic, and the
double check that it is properly posi- ram is a two stage type. When
tioned and will not slip. both rams are raised and the stop
Raise the car high enough so that the mark of the upper ram becomes
Stop
fully inflated spare tire can be installed. visible, stop jacking immediately.
mark
To do this, you will need more ground
clearance than is required to remove
the flat tire.
! WARNING:
HHP4019
Do not get under the car when it is
supported by the jack! This is very
dangerous as the vehicle could fall
! CAUTION:
and cause serious injury or death.
No one should stay in the car while
1) Use only the jack included with the jack is being used.
the vehicle and use it only for
changing a wheel and for in-
stalling tire chains.
HHP4020 2) Position the jack on a hard, level
Using the jack handle, turn the release surface.
3) If the release valve is loosened
valve counterclockwise slow to lower
by turning it 2 or more times in
the ram, and then take out the jack.
When the release valve is difficult to the counterclockwise direction,
the jack's oil will leak and the
turn by jack handle, connect the wheel
jack cannot be used.
nut wrench to the jack handle.
12
D060G02Y-AAT D060H02O-AAT
7. Changing Wheels 8. Reinstall Wheel Nuts
D060G02HP
D060G01HP D060H01HP
Use the wrench to loosen the wheel ! WARNING: To reinstall the wheel, hold it on the
nuts, then remove them with your fin- Wheel may have sharp edges. Handle studs, put the wheel nuts on the studs
gers. Slide the wheel off the studs and them carefully to avoid possible se- and tighten them finger tight. The nuts
lay it flat so it cannot roll away. To put vere injury. should be installed with their small
the wheel on the hub, pick up the spare Before putting the wheel into place, diameter ends directed inward. Jiggle
tire, line up the holes with the studs be sure that there is nothing on the the tire to be sure it is completely
and slide the wheel onto them. If this is hub or wheel (such as mud, tar, gravel, seated, then tighten the nuts as much
difficult, tip the wheel slightly and get etc.) that interferes with the wheel as possible with your fingers again.
the top hole in the wheel lined up with from fitting solidly against the hub. If
the top stud. Then jiggle the wheel there is, remove it. If there is not good
back and forth until the wheel can be contact on the mounting surface be-
slid over the other studs. tween the wheel and hub, the wheel
nuts could come loose and cause the
loss of a wheel. Loss of a wheel may
result in loss of control of the vehicle.
This may cause serious injury or death.
3
13
D060J01A-AAT
D060I02HP-GAT Go around the wheel tightening every
9. Lower Vehicle and Tighten other nut until they are all tight. Then AFTER CHANGING WHEELS
Nuts double-check each nut for tightness.
HHP5019
HHP4029
HHP4030 If you have a tire gauge, remove the
Lower the car to the ground by moving valve cap and check the air pressure.
And reinstall the wheel cap by fitting If the pressure is lower than recom-
the jack handle up and down. Then the boss of the wheel cap in the groove
position the wrench as shown in the mended, drive slowly to the nearest
of the wheel, hitting the center of the service station and inflate to the cor-
drawing and tighten the wheel nuts. Be wheel cap with hand.
sure the socket is seated completely rect pressure. If it is too high, adjust it
After changing wheels, have a techni- until it is correct. Always reinstall the
over the nut. Do not stand on the cian tighten the wheel nuts to their
wrench handle or use an extension valve cap after checking or adjusting
proper torque as soon as possible. tire pressure. If the cap is not replaced,
pipe over the wrench handle.
air may leak from the tire. If you lose a
Wheel nut tightening torque: valve cap, buy another and install it as
Steel wheel & aluminium alloy wheel: soon as possible.
900-1,100 kg.cm (65-80 lb.ft) After you have changed wheels, al-
ways secure the flat tire in its place and
return the jack, jack handle, and tools
to their proper storage locations.
14 IF YOUR VEHICLE MUST BE
TOWED
D080A02HR-GAT D080C02HP-GAT
If your vehicle has to be towed, it Towing the 4 Wheel Drive Ve-
should be done by your Hyundai dealer hicle ! CAUTION:
or a commercial tow truck service. o The 4WD vehicle should never
This will help assure that your vehicle be towed with the wheels on the
is not damaged in towing. Also, profes- ground. This can cause serious
sionals are generally aware of local damage to the transmission or
laws governing towing. In any case, the 4WD system.
rather than risk damage to your car, it o When towing the vehicle, take
is suggested that you show this infor- care not to cause damage to the
mation to the tow truck operator. Be bumper or underbody of the ve-
dolly
sure that a safety chain system is used hicle.
and that all local laws are observed.
It is recommended that your vehicle
be towed with a wheel lift and dollies or
flatbed equipment with all the wheels
off the ground.
dolly
! CAUTION:
o Your vehicle can be damaged if
towed incorrectly!
o Be sure the transmission is in HHP4045
HHP4044
neutral.
o When the engine will not start, be When towing the 4WD vehicle, it must o Do not tow with sling type truck
sure the steering is unlocked by be towed by lifting all 4 wheels or using as this may cause damage to the
placing the key in the "ACC" po- the towing dolly. bumper or underbody of the ve-
sition. hicle.
3
15
D080D03HP-GAT For emergency towing when no com-

Emergency Towing mercial tow vehicle is available, attach
Front a tow cable, chain or strap to one of the
towing hooks under the front/rear of
your car. Be very careful when at-
tempting this procedure when the ve-
hicle is on any unpaved surface to
avoid damage to your vehicle.
Nor should towing be attempted if the
wheels, drive train, axles, steering or
brakes are damaged. Before towing,
HHP4037
be sure the transmission is in neutral
and the key is in "ACC" (with the NOTE:
HHP4035
engine off) or in the "ON" position (with o To do the emergency towing, first
Rear the engine running). A driver must be remove the cover below the
in the towed car to steer it and operate bumper on passenger's side by
the brakes. pulling it
o To avoid serious damage to your
4WD vehicle, limit the towing to
15 km/h (10 mph) and not for
more than 1.5 km (1 mile) at ANY
TIME.
o Before towing, check the level of
the automatic transmission fluid.
HHP4036 If it is below the "HOT" range on
the dipstick, add fluid. If you can-
not add fluid, a towing dolly must
be used.
16 IF YOU LOSE YOUR KEYS
D120A01A-GAT
If you lose your keys, many Hyundai

dealers can make you a new key if you
have your key number. If you lock the
keys inside your car and you cannot
obtain a new key, many Hyundai deal-
ers can use special tools to open the
door for you. Information about the key
of immobilizer system (If Installed) will
be found on page 1-5.
CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE
Corrosion Protection .................................................... 4-2

To Help Prevent Corrosion ........................................... 4-3
Washing and Waxing ................................................... 4-4
Cleaning the Interior ..................................................... 4-6
4
4 CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE
2 CORROSION PROTECTION
E010A01A-AAT E010C01A-AAT Mud is particularly corrosive because

Protecting Your Hyundai from High-Corrosion Areas it is slow to dry and holds moisture in
Corrosion If you live in an area where your car is contact with the vehicle. Although the
By using the most advanced design regularly exposed to corrosive materi- mud appears to be dry, it can still retain
and construction practices to combat als, corrosion protection is particularly the moisture and promote corrosion.
corrosion, Hyundai produces cars of important. Some of the common High temperatures can also acceler-
the highest quality, However, this is causes of accelerated corrosion are ate corrosion of parts that are not
only part of the job. To achieve the road salts, dust control chemicals, properly ventilated so the moisture
long-term corrosion resistance your ocean air and industrial pollution. can be dispersed. For all these rea-
Hyundai can deliver, the owner's co- sons, it is particularly important to keep
operation and assistance is also re- your car clean and free of mud or
quired. accumulations of other materials. This
E010D01A-AAT applies not only to the visible surfaces
Moisture Breeds Corrosion but particularly to the underside of the
car.
E010B01A-AAT Moisture creates the conditions in
Common Causes of Corrosion which corrosion is most likely to occur.
The most common causes of corro- For example, corrosion is accelerated
sion on your car are: by high humidity, particularly when tem-
peratures are just above freezing. In
o Road salt, dirt and moisture that is such conditions, the corrosive mate-
allowed to accumulate underneath rial is kept in contact with the car
the car. surfaces by moisture that is slow to
o Removal of paint or protective coat- evaporate.
ings by stones, gravel, abrasion or
minor scrapes and dents which leave
unprotected metal exposed to cor-
rosion.
CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE
4
TO HELP PREVENT CORROSION 3
E020A01A-AAT ing it away will accelerate corrosion E020D01A-AAT
You can help prevent corrosion from rather than prevent it. Water under Keep Paint and Trim in Good
getting started by observing the follow- high pressure and steam are par- Condition
ing: ticularly effective in removing accu- Scratches or chips in the finish should
mulated mud and corrosive materi- be covered with "touch-up" paint as
als. soon as possible to reduce the possi-
E020B01A-AAT o When cleaning lower door panels, bility of corrosion. If bare metal is show-
Keep Your Car Clean rocker panels and frame members, ing through, the attention of a qualified
be sure that drain holes are kept body and paint shop is recommended.
The best way to prevent corrosion is to open so that moisture can escape
keep your car clean and free of corro- and not be trapped inside to ac-
sive materials. Attention to the under- celerate corrosion.
side of the car is particularly important. E020E01A-AAT
Don't Neglect the Interior
o If you live in a high-corrosion area — E020C01A-AAT
where road salts are used, near the Keep Your Garage Dry Moisture can collect under the floor
ocean, areas with industrial pollu- mats and carpeting to cause corro-
tion, acid rain, etc.—, you should Don't park your car in a damp, poorly sion. Check under the mats periodi-
take extra care to prevent corro- ventilated garage. This creates a fa- cally to be sure the carpeting is dry.
sion. In winter, hose off the under- vorable environment for corrosion. This Use particular care if you carry fertiliz-
side of your car at least once a is particularly true if you wash your car ers, cleaning materials or chemicals in
month and be sure to clean the in the garage or drive it into the garage the car.
underside thoroughly when winter when it is still wet or covered with These should be carried only in proper
is over. snow, ice or mud. Even a heated ga- containers and any spills or leaks
o When cleaning underneath the car, rage can contribute to corrosion un- should be cleaned up, flushed with
give particular attention to the com- less it is well ventilated so moisture is clear water and thoroughly dried.
ponents under the fenders and other dispersed.
areas that are hidden from view. Do
a thorough job; just dampening the
accumulated mud rather than wash-
4 WASHING AND WAXING
E030A02A-AAT line, strong solvents or abrasive clean- When the weather is warm and the
Washing Your Hyundai ing powders as these may damage the humidity low, you may find it neces-
Never wash your car when the surface finish. sary to rinse each section immediately
is hot from being in the sun. Always Use a clean sponge or cloth, rinse it after washing to avoid streaking.
wash your car in the shade. frequently and don't damage the finish
by rubbing too hard. For stubborn spots, After rinsing, dry the car using a damp
Wash your car frequently. Dirt is abra- dampen them frequently and remove chamois or soft, absorbent cloth. The
sive and can scratch the paint if it is not them a little at a time. reason for drying the car is to remove
removed. Air pollution or acid rain may To clean whitewall tires, use a stiff water from the car so it will dry without
damage the paint and trim through brush or soapy steel-wool scouring water spots. Don't rub, this can dam-
chemical action if pollutants are al- pad. age the finish.
lowed to remain in contact with the
surface. If you live near the ocean or in To clean plastic wheel covers, use a If you find any nicks or scratches in the
an area where road salts or dust con- clean sponge or soft cloth and water. paint, use touch-up paint to cover them
trol chemicals are used, you should to prevent corrosion. To protect the
pay particular attention to the under- To clean cast aluminum alloy wheels, paintwork of the car against corrosion,
side of the car. Start by rinsing the car use a mild soap or neutral detergent. you must clean your Hyundai (at least
to remove dust and loose dirt. In win- Do not use abrasive cleaners. Protect once a month). Give special attention
ter, or if you have driven through mud the bare-metal surfaces by cleaning, to the removal of salt, mud and other
or muddy water, be sure to thoroughly polishing and waxing. Because alumi- substances on the underside of the
clean the underside as well. Use a num is subject to corrosion, be sure to splashboards of the car. Make sure
hard direct stream of water to remove give aluminum alloy wheels special that the outlets and the underside of
accumulations of mud or corrosive attention in winter. If you drive on the doors are open. Paint damage can
materials. Use a good quality car-wash- salted roads, clean the wheels thor- be caused by small accumulation of
ing solution and follow the manufac- oughly afterwards. tar, industrial precipitation, tree resin,
turer's directions on the package. insects and bird droppings, when not
These are available at your Hyundai After washing, be sure to rinse thor- removed immediately.
dealer or auto parts outlet. Don't use oughly. If soapy water dries on the
strong household detergents, gaso- finish, streaking will result.
4
5
If water alone is not strong enough to E030B01A-AAT E030D01A-AAT
remove the accumulated dirt, use a Spot Cleaning When to Wax Again
mild car washing solution. Be sure to Don't use gasoline, strong solvents or You should polish and wax the car
rinse the surface after washing to re- corrosive cleaning agents. These can again when water no longer beads on
move the solution. Never allow the damage the finish of the car. To re- a clean surface but spreads out over a
solution to dry on the painted surfaces. move road tar, use turpentine on a larger area.
clean, soft cloth or commercially avail-
! CAUTION:
able bug and tar remover. Be gentle.
To remove dead insects or tree sap,
o Water washing in the engine com- use warm water and mild soap or car- E030E01A-AAT
partment may cause the failure of washing solution. Soak the spot and Maintaining Bumpers
electrical circuits located in the rub gently. If the paint has lost its Special precautions must be observed
engine compartment. luster, use a commercial car-cleaning to preserve the appearance of the
o Never allow water or other liquids polish. bumpers on your Hyundai. They are:
to come in contact with electrical/
electronic components inside the o Be careful not to spill battery elec-
vehicle as this may damage them. trolyte or hydraulic brake fluid on the
E030C01A-AAT
bumpers. If you do, wash it off
Polishing and Waxing immediately with clean water.
Always wash and dry the car before o Be gentle when cleaning the bumper
polishing or waxing or using a combi- surfaces. They are made of soft
nation cleaner and wax. Use a good plastic and the surface can be dam-
quality commercial product and follow aged if mistreated. Do not use abra-
the manufacturer's directions on the sive cleaners. Use warm water and
container. Polish and wax the bright mild soap or car-washing solution.
trim pieces as well as the paint. o Do not expose the bumpers to high
temperatures. For example, if you
have your car repainted, do not
leave the bumpers on the car if the
car is going to be placed in a high-
temperature paint booth.
6 CLEANING THE INTERIOR
E040A01A-AAT E040B01A-AAT During tanning operations, sufficient

To Clean the Vinyl Upholstery To Clean the Leather Upholstery oils are incorporated through process-
To clean the vinyl upholstery, first re- (If Installed) ing that none need be applied during
move loose dirt and dust with a vacuum In the normal course of use, leather the life of the leather. Oil applied to the
cleaner. Then apply a solution of mild upholstered surfaces will, like any finished surface will in no way help the
soap or detergent and water using a material, pick-up dust and dirt. This leather and may do more harm than
clean sponge or soft cloth. Allow this to dust and dirt must be cleaned off or it good. Varnishes and furniture polishes
stay on the surface to loosen the dirt, may work into the surface of the leather, should never be used under any con-
then wipe with a clean damp sponge or causing damage. ditions.
cloth. If all the dirt stains are not re-
moved, repeat this procedure until the Fine leather needs care, and should
upholstery is clean. Do not use gaso- be cleaned when necessary. Washing E040C01A-AAT
line, solvent, paint thinner or other leather thoroughly with soap and water Cleaning the Carpets
strong cleaners. will keep your leather lustrous, beauti- Use a foam-type carpet cleaner. Clean-
ful and ensure you have many years of ers of this type are available in aerosol
wear. cans in liquid form or powder. Read the
Take a piece of cheese cloth and using instructions and follow them exactly.
any mild soap and lukewarm water, Using a vacuum cleaner with the ap-
work up a good lather. Thoroughly propriate attachment, remove as much
wash the leather. Wipe clean with a dirt from the carpets as possible. Apply
slightly damp cloth and dry with soft the foam following the manufacturer's
cloth. Do this as often as the leather directions, then rub in overlapping
becomes soiled. circles. Do not add water. These clean-
ers work best when the carpet is kept
as dry as possible.
4
ANY QUESTIONS? 7
E040D01A-AAT E050A01A-AAT
Cleaning the Seat Belts If you have any questions about the
To clean the seat belts, use a cloth or care of your car, consult your Hyundai
sponge with mild soap or detergent dealer.
and warm water. Do not use strong
detergents, dye, bleach or abrasive
materials on the seat belts as this may
weaken the fabric.
While cleaning the belts, inspect them
for excessive wear, cuts, fraying or
other signs of damage and replace
them if necessary.
E040E01A-AAT
Cleaning the Windows
You may use any household window
cleaner on the windows. However,
when cleaning the inside of the rear
window be careful not to damage the
rear window defroster wiring.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
Maintenance Intervals .................................................. 5-2

Scheduled Maintenance ............................................... 5-4
Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions ............ 5-8
Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Items .............. 5-9
5 5
5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
2 MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
F010A01A-GAT F010B01A-AAT It is suggested that genuine Hyundai

Service Requirements Maintenance Requirements service parts be used for any required
To assure that you receive the great- The maintenance required for your repairs or replacements. Other parts of
est number of kilometers of satisfying Hyundai can be divided into three main equivalent quality such as engine oil,
operation from your Hyundai, certain areas: engine coolant, manual or auto trans-
maintenance procedures must be permission oil, brake fluid and so on
formed. Although careful design and o Specified scheduled procedures which are not supplied by Hyundai
engineering have reduced these to a o General checks Motor Company or its distributor may
minimum, those that are required are o Do-it-yourself maintenance be used without affecting your war-
of the utmost importance. ranty coverage but you should always
It is your responsibility to have these be sure these are equivalent to the
maintenance procedures performed to quality of the original Hyundai parts.
comply with the terms of the warran- F010C01HP-GAT Your Service Passport provides fur-
ties covering your new Hyundai. The Specified Scheduled Procedures ther information about your warranty
Service Passport supplied with your coverage.
These are the procedures such as
new vehicle provides further informa- inspections, adjustments and replace-
tion about these warranties. ments that are listed in the mainte-
nance charts starting on page 5-4. F010D01A-AAT
These procedures must be performed General Checks

at the intervals shown in the mainte- These are the regular checks you
nance schedule to assure that your should perform when you drive your
warranty remains in effect. Although it Hyundai or you fill the fuel tank. A list
is strongly recommended that they be of these items will be found on page 6-
performed by the factory-trained or 5.
distributor-trained technicians at your
Hyundai dealer, these procedures may
be performed at any qualified service
facility.
5
SCHEDULED MAINTE- 3
NANCE REQUIREMENTS
F010E01A-AAT F020A01Y-GAT
Do-It-Yourself Maintenance Inspection should be performed any
If you are mechanically inclined, own a time a malfunction is experienced or
few tools that are required and want to suspected. Receipts for all emission
take the time to do so, you can inspect control system services should be re-
and service a number of items. For tained to demonstrate compliance with
more information about doing it your- conditions of the emissions system
self, see Section 6. warranty.
For severe usage maintenance require-
ments, see page 5-8 of this section.
F010F01A-GAT
A Few Tips
Whenever you have your Hyundai ser-
viced, keep copies of the service
records in your glove box. This will
help ensure that you can document
that the required procedures have been
performed to keep your warranties in
effect. This is especially important
when service is not performed by an
authorized Hyundai dealer.
4 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
F030A01A-GAT
The following maintenance services must be performed to assure good vehicle control and performance. Keep receipts for
all vehicle services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is determined
by whichever occurs first.
F030B03HP-GAT
R :Replace I : Inspect and, after Inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary.
KILOMETERS X 1000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
NO. DESCRIPTION
MONTHS 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE (GASOLINE ENGINE)
1 ENGINE OIL AND FILTER R R R R R R R R
2 DRIVE BELT (ALT, DAMPER, TENSIONER, IDLER) I I I I I I I I
3 FUEL FILTER (MPI TYPE) R R
4 FUEL LINES, FUEL HOSES AND CONNECTIONS I I I I I I I I
5 TIMING BELT I R
6 VAPOR HOSE AND FUEL FILLER CAP I I I I I I I I
7 CRANKCASE VENTILATION HOSES I I I I
8 AIR CLEANER FILTER I R I R I R I R
9 SPARK PLUGS See Note (1)
SPARK PLUGS (PLATINUM COATED) See Note (2)
Note: (1) Every 40,000km : "R"
(2) Every 100,000km : "R"
5
5
F030D04HP-GAT
KILOMETERS X 1000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120

NO. DESCRIPTION
MONTHS 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE (DIESEL ENGINE (2.5 TCI))
1 ENGINE OIL AND FILTER European Community Only See Note (1)
(API CF-4 OR ABOVE, ACEA B2 OR B3) Except European Community See Note (2)
2 AIR CLEANER FILTER I R I R I R I R
3 FUEL FILTER R R R R
4 VALVE CLEARANCE I I I I I I I I
5 INJECTION TIMING I I I I
6 ALTERNATOR VACUUM PUMP I I I I I I I I
7 ALTERNATOR OIL HOSE AND VACUUM HOSE I I I I I I I I
8 TIMING BELT I R I
9 DRIVE BELT (FOR WATER PUMP/ALTERNATOR) I I I R I I I R
10 ENGINE IDLE SPEED I I I I I I I I
11 FUEL SYSTEM LEAKS I I I I I I I I
12 INJECTION NOZZLE I I I I
Note: (1) For every 7,500 km or 6 months, whichever occurs first : "R"
(2) For every 5,000 km or 6 months, whichever occurs first : "R"
6
F030E09HP-GAT
KILOMETERS X 1000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120

NO. DESCRIPTION
MONTHS 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE (DIESEL ENGINE (2.9 CRDi))
1 ENGINE OIL AND FILTER (API CF-4 Europe Countries Only R R R R R R R R
OR ABOVE, ACEA B4 OR ABOVE) Except Europe Countries See Note (1)
2 AIR CLEANER FILTER I I R I I R I I
3 FUEL FILTER CARTRIDGE See Note (2) R R R R
4 TIMING BELT R
5 DRIVE BELT (FOR AIR COMPRESSOR, ALTERNATOR) I I I I
6 ALTERNATOR VACUUM PUMP I I I I I I I I
7 ALTERNATOR OIL HOSE & VACUUM HOSE I I I I I I I I
8 FUEL LINES, FUEL HOSE & CONNECTIONS I I I I I I I I
Note: (1) For every 10,000 km or 12 months, whichever occurs first : "R"
(2) If the diesel fuel specifications don't meet the EUROPEAN standards EN590, replace it more frequently.
Consult an authorized hyundai dealer for details.
5
7
F030C08HP-GAT
R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
KILOMETERS X 1000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120

NO. DESCRIPTION
MONTHS 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
1 COOLING SYSTEM I I I I I I I I
2 COOLANT GASOLINE ENGINE See Note (1)
DIESEL ENGINE R R R R
3 MANUAL TRANSMISSION OIL I I I I I I I I
4 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION European Community Only I I I I I R I I
FLUID Except European Community I I I I I I I I
5 BRAKE HOSES AND LINES I I I I I I I I
6 BRAKE FLUID, CLUTCH FLUID I I I I I I I I
7 REAR BRAKE DRUMS/LININGS, PARKING BRAKE I I I I I I I I
8 BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS I I I I I I I I
9 EXHAUST PIPE AND MUFFLER I I I I I I I I
10 SUSPENSION MOUNTING BOLTS I I I I I I I I
11 STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/
I I I I I I I I
LOWER ARM BALL JOINT, UPPER ARM BALL JOINT
12 POWER STEERING PUMP AND HOSES I I I I I I I I
13 DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS I I I I
14 AIR CONDITIONING REFRIGERANT I I I I I I I I
15 TRANSFER CASE OIL I I I I I I I I
16 AXLE GEAR OIL R I I R I I R I
17 PROPELLER SHAFT CLEAN, BOLT RETIGHTEN I I I I
18 CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (For Evaporator and Blower Unit) R R R R R R R R
Note: (1) FOR EVERY 24 MONTHS OR 45,000 KM, WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST : "R"
8 MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS
F040A07HP-GAT
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the
chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
MAINTENANCE DRIVING
MAINTENANCE ITEM MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
OPERATION CONDITION
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER (Gasoline Engine) EVERY 7,500 KM OR 6 MONTHS A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, K
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER European Community Only EVERY 4,000 KM
(Diesel Engine (2.5 TCI)) Except European Community R EVERY 3,000 KM
A, B, F, G, H, I, J
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER Europe Countries Only EVERY 7,500 KM OR 6 MONTHS
(Diesel Engine (2.9 CRDi)) Except Europe Countries EVERY 5,000 KM OR 6 MONTHS
AIR CLEANER FILTER R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E
SPARK PLUGS (For Gasoline Engine) R MORE FREQUENTLY G, H, I, J
TIMING BELT R EVERY 60,000 KM OR 48 MONTHS D, E, F, G
BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, E, G, H, I
REAR BRAKE DRUMS/LININGS, PARKING BRAKE I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, E, G, H, I
STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE AND BOOTS/
I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, E, F
LOWER ARM BALL JOINT, UPPER ARM BALL JOINT
DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS I EVERY 15,000 KM OR 12 MONTHS C, D, E, F
MANUAL TRANSMISSION OIL R EVERY 100,000 KM A, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION European Community Only EVERY 45,000 KM
R A, C, E, F, G, H, I
FLUID Except European Community EVERY 40,000 KM
TRANSFER CASE OIL *1 R EVERY 100,000 KM C, E, G, H, I
AXLE GEAR OIL *1 R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E, G, H, I
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (For Evaporator and Blower Unit) R MORE FREQUENTLY C,E
SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS
A - Repeatly driving short distance of less than 8km(5miles) in E - Driving in sandy areas
normal temperature or less than 16km(10miles) in freezing F - Driving in heavy traffic area over 32°C(90°F)
temperature G - Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road
B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances H - Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack
I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle towing
C - Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt- J - Driving over 170 Km/h(100 MPH)
spread roads
D - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
cold weather
*1: Transfer Case Oil and Axle Gear Oil should be checked (and replaced if necessary) anytime they have been submerged in water over 40cm (15.7 in.) deep.
5
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS 9
F060M01A-AAT F060C01A-AAT F060D01TB-GAT

o Engine Oil and Filter o Fuel filter o Fuel Lines, Fuel Hoses and
The engine oil and filter should be A clogged filter can limit the speed at Connections
changed at the intervals specified in which the vehicle may be driven, dam- Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and
the maintenance schedule. If the car age the emission system and cause connections for leakage and damage.
is being driven in severe conditions, hard starting. If an excessive amount Have a trained technician replace any
more frequent oil and filter changes of foreign matter accumulates in the damaged or leaking parts immediately.
are required. fuel tank, the filter may require re-
placement more frequently.
After installing a new filter, run the
F060B01A-AAT
engine for several minutes, and check ! WARNING (Diesel only):
for leaks at the connections. Fuel fil- Never work on injection system with
o Drive belts ters should be installed by trained engine running or within 30 sec-
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of technicians. onds after shutting off engine. High
cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil pressure pump, rail, injectors and
saturation and replace if necessary. high pressure pipes are subjected
Drive belts should be checked periodi- to high pressure even after the en-
cally for proper tension and adjusted gine has been switched off. The fuel
as necessary. jet produced by fuel leaks may cause
serious injury, if it contacts with the
body. People using pacemakers
should not move closer than 30cm
to the ECU or wiring harness within
the engine room with the engine
running, since the high currents in
the Common Rail system produce
considerable magnetic fields.
10
F060E01A-AAT F060F0HP-AAT F060H01A-AAT

o Timing belt o Crankcase Ventilation Hoses o Air Cleaner Filter
Inspect all parts related to the timing Inspect the surface of hoses for evi- A Genuine Hyundai air cleaner filter is
belt for damage and deformation. Re- dence of heat and/or mechanical dam- recommended when the filter is re-
place any damaged parts immediately. age. Hard and brittle rubber, cracking, placed.
tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive
swelling indicate deterioration. Particu-
lar attention should be paid to examine F060J01A-AAT
F060G01A-AAT those hose surfaces nearest to high o Spark Plugs
o Vapor Hose and Fuel Filler Cap heat sources, such as the exhaust (For Gasoline Engine)
manifold.
The vapor hose and fuel filler cap Inspect the hose routing to assure that Make sure to install new spark plugs
should be inspected at those intervals the hoses do not come in contact with of the correct heat range.
specified in the maintenance sched- any heat source, sharp edges or mov-
ule. Make sure that a new vapor hose ing component which might cause heat
or fuel filler cap is correctly replaced. damage or mechanical wear. Inspect F070B01A-GAT
all hose connections, such as clamps o Cooling System

and couplings, to make sure they are Check the cooling system part, such
secure, and that no leaks are present. as radiator, coolant reservoir, hoses
Hoses should be replaced immedi- and connections for leakage and dam-
ately if there is any evidence of dete- age. Replace any damaged parts.
rioration or damage.
F070C01A-AAT
o Coolant
The coolant should be changed at
the intervals specified in the mainte-
nance schedule.
5
11
F070D01A-AAT F070F01A-AAT F070J01A-AAT

o Manual Transmission Oil o Brake Hoses and Lines o Brake Pads, Calipers and
Inspect the manual transmission oil Visually check for proper installation, Rotors
according to the maintenance sched- chafing, cracks, deterioration and any Check the pads for excessive wear,
ule. leakage. Replace any deteriorated or discs for run out and wear, and cali-
damaged parts immediately. pers for fluid leakage.
NOTE:
If the oil level is low, check for
possible leaks before adding oil. Do F070G02A-AAT F070K01A-AAT
not overfill. o Brake Fluid o Exhaust Pipe and Muffler

Check brake fluid level in the brake Visually inspect the exhaust pipes,
fluid reservoir. The level should be muffler and hangers for cracks, dete-
F070E03HP-GAT between "MIN" and "MAX" marks on rioration, or damage. Start the engine
o Automatic Transmission Fluid the side of the reservoir. Use only and listen carefully for any exhaust
The fluid level should be in the "HOT" hydraulic brake fluid conforming to DOT gas leakage. Tighten connections or
range of the dipstick, after the engine 3 or DOT 4. replace parts as necessary.
and transmission are at normal operat-
ing temperature. Check the automatic F070H01A-AAT
F070L01A-AAT
transmission fluid level with the engine o Rear Brake Drums/ Linings
running and the transmission in neu- o Suspension Mounting Bolts
Parking Brake
tral, with the parking brake properly Check the suspension connections for
applied. Use MOBIL DEXRON-II when Check the rear brake drums and lin- looseness or damage. Retighten to the
adding or changing fluid. ings for scoring, burning, leaking fluid, specified torque.
broken parts, and excessive wear. In-
spect the parking brake system in-
cluding the parking brake lever and
cables. For detailed service proce-
dures, refer to the Shop Manual.
12
F070M01B-AAT F070P01A-AAT
o Steering Gear Box, Linkage & o Drive Shafts and Boots
Boots/Lower Arm Ball Joint, Check the drive shafts, boots and
Upper Arm Ball Joint clamps for cracks, deterioration, or
With the vehicle stopped and engine damage. Replace any damaged parts
off, check for excessive free-play in and, if necessary, repack the grease.
the steering wheel.
Check the linkage for bends or dam-
age. Check the dust boots and ball F070Q01A-AAT
joints for deterioration, cracks, or dam- o Air Conditioning Refrigerant
age. Replace any damaged parts.
Check the air conditioning lines and
connections for leakage and damage.
F070N01A-AAT
Check air conditioning performance
o Power Steering Pump, Belt according to the relevant shop manual
and Hoses if necessary.
Check the power steering pump and

hoses for leakage and damage. Re-
place any damaged or leaking parts
immediately. Inspect the power steer-
ing belt for evidence of cuts, cracks,
excessive wear, oiliness and proper
tension. Replace or adjust it if neces-
sary.
Engine Compartment .................................................... 6-2

General Checks ........................................................... 6-5
Maintenance Precautions ............................................. 6-6
Checking the Engine Oil .............................................. 6-6
Checking and Changing the Engine Coolant ..............6-10
Changing the Air Cleaner Filter ...................................6-13
Checking the Transmission Oil (Manual) ...................6-16
Checking the Transmission Fluid (Automatic) ............6-17
6
Checking the Brakes ..................................................6-20
Checking the Clutch Fluid ...........................................6-21
Air Conditioning Care ..................................................6-22
Changing the Climate Control Air Filter ......................6-23 6
Checking and Replacing Fuses ..................................6-24
Checking The Battery .................................................6-27
Checking The Electric Cooling Fans ..........................6-29
Power Steering Fluid Level .........................................6-29
Fuel Filter .....................................................................6-30
Replacement of Headlight Bulbs .................................6-34
Headlight Aiming Adjustment ......................................6-35
Bulb Wattages .............................................................6-38
Fuse Panel Description ...............................................6-39
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
2 ENGINE COMPARTMENT
G010A01HP-GAT
Gasoline Engine (3.5 V6)
! CAUTION:
When inspecting or servic-
ing the engine, you should
handle tools and other
heavy objects carefully so
that the plastic cover of the
engine is not damaged.
G010A01HP
1. Fuse and Relay Box 6. Windshield Washer Fluid Reser- 10.Automatic Transmission Fluid
2. Battery voir Level Dipstick (Vehicle With Auto-
3. Engine Cover 7. Air Cleaner Filter matic Transmission)
4. Brake Fluid Reservoir 8. Radiator Cap 11.Engine Oil Level Dipstick
5. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 9. Engine Oil Filler Cap 12.Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap
6
3
G010B01HP-GAT
Diesel Engine (2.5 TCI)
! CAUTION:
G010B01HP
1. Fuse and Relay Box 5. Engine Oil Level Dipstick 10.Windshield Washer Fluid Reser-
2. Battery 6. Engine Cover voir
3. Automatic Transmission Fluid 7. Brake Fluid Reservoir 11.Air Cleaner Filter
Level Dipstick (Vehicle With Auto- 8. Clutch Fluid Reservoir (If Installed) 12.Radiator Cap
matic Transmission) 9. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 13.Fuel Filter
4. Engine Oil Filler Cap 14.Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap
4
G010C01HP-GAT
! CAUTION:
G010C01HP
1. Fuse and Relay Box 6. Brake Fluid Reservoir 10.Automatic Transmission Fluid
2. Battery 7. Windshield Washer Fluid Reser- Level Dipstick (Vehicle With Auto-
3. Engine Oil Level Dipstick voir matic Transmission)
4. Engine Cover 8. Air Cleaner Filter 11.Fuel Filter
5. Engine Oil Filler Cap 9. Radiator Cap 12.Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
13.Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap
6
GENERAL CHECKS 5
G020A02HP-GAT G020B01A-AAT G020C01HP-GAT

Engine Compartment Vehicle Exterior Vehicle Interior
The following should be checked regu- The following should be checked The following should be checked each
larly: monthly: time when the vehicle is driven:
o Engine oil level and condition o Overall appearance and condition o Lights operation
o Transmission fluid level and condi- o Wheel condition and wheel nut torque o Windshield wiper operation
tion o Exhaust system condition o Horn operation
o Brake fluid level o Light condition and operation o Defroster, heating system operation
o Clutch fluid level o Windshield glass condition (and air conditioning, if installed)
o Engine coolant level o Wiper blade condition o Steering operation and condition
o Windshield washer fluid level o Paint condition and body corrosion o Mirror condition and operation
o Accessory drive belt condition o Fluid leaks o Turn signal operation
o Engine coolant hose condition o Door and hood lock condition o Accelerator pedal operation
o Fluid leaks o Tire pressure and condition o Brake operation, including parking
(on or below components) (including spare tire) brake
o Power steering fluid level o Manual transmission operation, in-
o Battery condition cluding clutch operation
o Climate control air filter condition o Automatic transmission operation,
including "Park" mechanism opera-
tion
o Seat control condition and opera-
tion
o Seat belt condition and operation
o Sun visor operation
If you notice anything that does not

operate correctly or appears to be
functioning incorrectly, inspect it care-
fully and seek assistance from your
Hyundai dealer if service is needed.
6 MAINTENANCE PRECAU- CHECKING THE ENGINE
TIONS OIL
G020D01TG-GAT G030A01A-AAT
Improper or incomplete service may

result in problems. This section gives
! WARNING:
Engine oil is essential to the perfor-
mance and service of the engine. It is
instructions only for the maintenance o Performing maintenance work on suggested that you check the oil level
items that are easy to perform. a vehicle can be dangerous. You at least once a week in normal use
Several procedures should be done by can be seriously injured while and more often if you are on a trip or
an authorized Hyundai dealer. performing some maintenance driving in severe conditions.
procedures. If you lack sufficient
NOTE: knowledge and experience or the
Improper owner maintenance dur- proper tools and equipment to do
ing the warranty period may affect the work, have it done by an
warranty coverage. authorized Hyundai dealer.
o Working under the hood with the
engine running is dangerous. It
becomes even more dangerous
when you wear jewelry or loose
clothing. These can become en-
tangled in moving parts and re-
sult in injury. Therefore, if you
must run the engine while work-
ing under the hood, make certain
that you remove all jewelry (espe-
cially rings, bracelets, watches,
and necklaces) and all neckties,
scarves, and similar loose cloth-
ing before getting near the en-
gine or cooling fans.
6
7
G030B06HP-GAT
NOTE: 2. Diesel Engine
Recommended Oil o For good fuel economy, SAE
1. Gasoline Engine (1) Select engine oil of the proper SAE
5W-20 (5W-30), ILSAC GF-3 en-
viscosity number according to the
(1) Select engine oil of the proper gine oil is preferred regardless
atmospheric temperature.
SAE viscosity number according of regional option and engine
Recommended viscosity is given
to the atmospheric temperature. variation.
in the following illustration.
Recommended viscosity is given o If SAE 5W-20, ILSAC GF-3 en-
in the following illustration. gine oil is not available, second- 2.5 TCI
ary recommended engine oil for
corresponding temperature
range can be used.
G030B01HR
G030B01JM
2.9 CRDi
(2) The engine oil quality should meet

the following classification.
API SJ, SL or ABOVE,

ILSAC GF-3 or ABOVE
G030B01HP-2
8
NOTE: G030C02HP-AAT
Gasoline Engine
For diesel-powered vehicle SAE 0W- To Check the Oil Level
30 oil should be used only in areas Before checking the oil, warm up the
where extremely cold temperatures engine to the normal operating tem-
of 10°C(50°F) or below are experi- perature and be sure your car is
enced. parked on level ground. Turn the en-
gine off.
the following API classification: Diesel Engine (2.5 TCI)
Diesel Engine (2.5 TCI) :

G030C01HP
CF-4 or ABOVE
Diesel Engine (2.9 CRDi) : Diesel Engine (2.5 TCI)
CF-4 or ABOVE

the following ACEA classification :
Diesel Engine (2.5 TCI) : B2 or B3 G030C03HP

Diesel Engine (2.9 CRDi) : B4 or
ABOVE NOTE:
Before checking or adding the en-
gine oil, remove the cover above
the engine oil filler cap and the G030C02HP
engine oil level dipstick with a

blade screwdriver inserted in the
notch (2.5 TCI only).
6
9
G030D02HP-GAT
Diesel Engine (2.9 CRDi) Diesel Engine (2.9 CRDi)
Adding Oil
Gasoline Engine
HHP5002 HHP5003
Wait ten minutes, then remove the If the oil level is close to or below the
G030D01HP
dipstick, wipe it off, fully reinsert the "L" mark, add oil until it reaches the
dipstick and withdraw it again. Then Diesel Engine (2.5 TCI) "F" mark. To add oil:
note the highest level the oil has
reached on the dipstick. It should be 1. Remove the oil filler cap by turning
between the upper ("F") and lower it counterclockwise.
("L") range. 2. Add oil, then check the level again.
Do not overfill.
3. Replace the cap by turning it clock-
wise.
! WARNING:
Be very careful not to touch the The distance between the "F" and "L"
radiator hose when checking the marks is equal to about 1 liter (Gaso-
G030D02HP
engine oil as it may be hot enough line Engine/Diesel Engine (2.5 TCI))/
to burn you. 1.4 liters (Diesel Engine (2.9 CRDi))
of oil.
10 CHECKING AND CHANGING
THE ENGINE COOLANT
Engine oil consumption G050A01A-AAT
! CAUTION: It is normal that an engine should

Slowly pour the recommended oil consume some engine oil while nor- ! WARNING:
using by a funnel. Do not overfill mal driving. The cause of oil con- Do not remove the radiator cap when
not to damage engine. sumption in a normal engine are as the engine is hot. When the engine
follows; is hot, the engine coolant is under
pressure and may erupt through the
o Engine oil is used to lubricate pis- opening if the cap is removed. You
! WARNING:
tons, piston rings and cylinders. could be seriously burned if you do
A thin film of oil is left on the not observe this precaution. Do not
Be very careful not to touch the cylinder wall when a piston moves
radiator hose when adding the en- remove the radiator cap until the
downwards in the cylinder. High radiator is cool to touch.
gine oil as it may be hot enough to negative pressure generated dur-
burn you. ing engine operation sucks some
of the oil into the combustion cham-
ber.
This oil with some oil of the cylin-
der wall is burned by the high tem-
perature combustion gases during
G350A01A-GAT the combustion process.
ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION o The engine oil consumption is
Function of Engine Oil strongly effected by the viscosity
Engine oil has the primary function of and quality of oil, engine rpm and
lubricating and cooling the inside of driving condition etc. The engine
the engine. oil is more consumed under severe
driving conditions such as high
speeds and frequent acceleration
and deceleration than normal driv-
ing condition.
6
11
G050B01A-DAT G050C01A-AAT G050D02HP-GAT

Recommended Engine Coolant To Check the Coolant Level To Change the Engine Coolant
Use a high quality ethylene-glycol cool-
The engine coolant should be changed
ant in a 50/50 mix with water. The
at those intervals specified in the ve-
engine coolant should be compatible
hicle maintenance schedule in Sec-
with aluminum engine parts. Addi-
tion 5.
tional corrosion inhibitors or additives
should not be used. The cooling sys-
tem must be maintained with the cor-
rect concentration and type of engine
! CAUTION:
coolant to prevent freezing and corro- Engine coolant can damage the fin-
sion. Never allow the concentration of ish of your car. If you spill engine
antifreeze to exceed the 60% level or coolant on the car, wash it off thor-
go below the 35% level, otherwise HHP5005 oughly with clean water.
damage to the cooling system may The coolant level can be seen on the
result. For proper concentration when side of the plastic coolant reservoir. 1. Park the car on level ground, set the
adding or replacing the engine cool- The level of the coolant should be parking brake and remove the radia-
ant, refer to the following table. between the "LOW" and "FULL" lines tor cap when cool.
on the reservoir when the engine is
Gasoline Engine only
Ambient Engine Coolant concentration cool. If the level is below the "LOW"
tempera- Antifreeze mark, add engine coolant to bring it
Water up between "LOW" and "FULL". If the
ture solution
level is low, inspect for coolant leaks
°C ( °F) 35% 65% and recheck the fluid level frequently.
-15 (5) 40% 60% If the level drops again, visit your
-25 (-13) 50% 50% Hyundai dealer for an inspection and
diagnosis of the reason.
-35 (-31) 60% 40%
-45 (-49)
G050D02HP
12
NOTE: Gasoline Engine Only Diesel Engine (2.9 CRDi) 4. Check Section 9 for the capacity of
Before adding the coolant to the the cooling system in your car.
radiator, unscrew the bolts on the Then, following the manufacturer’s
engine cover, remove the engine directions on the engine coolant
cover and unscrew the flange bolt container, add the appropriate quan-
for fitting water outlet to escape tity of coolant to the radiator.
the excess pressure. And if the 5. Fill the radiator with clean deminer-
coolant overflows from the hole alized or distilled water. Continue
while adding the coolant, screw to add clean demineralized or dis-
the bolt and continue to add the tilled water in small quantities until
coolant. the fluid level stays up in the radia-
HHP5006 tor neck.
2. Turn the radiator cap counterclock-
Gasoline Engine or Diesel Engine (2.5 TCI) wise without pressing down on it,
until it stops. This relieves any pres-
sure remaining in the cooling sys-
tem. And remove the radiator cap
by pushing down and turning coun-
terclockwise.
3. Be sure your drain receptacle is in
place. Open the drain cock on the
radiator. Allow all the engine cool-
ant to drain from the cooling sys-
G050D01HP
tem, then securely close the drain HHP5008
cock.
6
CHANGING THE AIR 13
CLEANER FILTER
6. Start the engine, top off the radiator G070A03Y-AAT
with water and then add coolant to

the reservoir until the level is be-
! CAUTION:
tween "LOW" and "FULL". o Operating your vehicle without a
7. Replace the radiator and reservoir proper air cleaner filter in place
caps and check to be sure the drain can result in excessive engine
cocks are fully closed and not leak- wear.
ing. o When removing the air cleaner
filter, be careful that dust or dirt
does not enter the air intake.
These may result in damage to
! WARNING: HHP5013
the air cleaner filter.
The cooling fan is controlled by
engine coolant temperature and may The replacement of air cleaner filter is
sometimes operate even when the performed in the following manner.
engine is not running. Use extreme
caution when working near the 1. Unsnap the clips around the cover.
blades of the coolant fan so that you 2. When this is done, the cover can
are not injured by a rotating fan be lifted off, the old filter removed
blade. As the engine coolant tem- and the new filter put in its place.
perature decreases, the fan will au-
tomatically shut off. This is a nor- Genuine Hyundai replacement parts
mal condition. are recommended.
14 WINDSHIELD WIPER
BLADES
G080A02A-AAT G080B01HR-GAT
Replacing the Wiper Blades
! CAUTION: To replace the wiper blades, raise the
o Do not operate the wipers on dry wiper to the vertical.
glass. This can result in more
rapid wear of the wiper blades
To remove the wiper blade
and may scratch the glass.
o Keep the blade rubber out of
contact with petroleum products
such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
HHP5045-E
The wiper blades should be carefully

inspected from time to time and
cleaned to remove accumulations of
road film or other debris. To clean the
(1)
wiper blades and arms, use a clean
HHR5048
sponge or cloth with a mild soap or
detergent and water. If the wipers 1. Push down the wiper blade with the
continue to streak or smear the glass, locking clip (1) pressed to detach it
replace them with genuine Hyundai from the wiper arm.
replacement parts or their equivalent.
6
15
To install the wiper blade
HHR5049 HHR5051
HHR5050 2. Pull up the wiper blade until you

2. Raise the wiper blade lightly and hear an audible "click" to engage in
pull up it. 1. Put a new wiper blade onto the
the end of the wiper arm.
wiper arm and lower the wiper blade
at the level of the wiper arm as
shown in the drawing. NOTE:
Do not allow the wiper arm to fall
against the windshield.
16 FILLING THE WASHER CHECKING THE TRANS-
RESERVOIR MISSION OIL (MANUAL)
G090A02HP-AAT G100A04HP-GAT
! CAUTION:
o Radiator antifreeze (engine cool-
ant) should not be used in the
washer system because it will
damage the car's finish.
o The washer should not be oper-
ated if the washer reservoir is
empty. This can damage the
washer fluid pump. Drain plug
Filler plug
HHP5017 HHP5010
The washer fluid reservoir supplies

fluid to the windshield washer sys-
! WARNING:
Transmission lubricant in the manual
transmission should be checked at
tem. o Windshield washer fluid agents those intervals specified in the ve-
A good quality washer fluid should be contain some amounts of alco- hicle maintenance schedule in Sec-
used to fill the washer reservoir. The hol and can be flammable under tion 5.
fluid level should be checked more certain circumstances. Do not
frequently during inclement weather allow sparks or flame to contact Recommended Oil
or whenever the washer system is in the washer fluid or the washer
more frequent use. Use only HYUNDAI GENUINE
fluid reservoir. Damage to the PARTS MTF 75W/85 (API GL-4) in
The capacity of the washer reservoir vehicle or its occupants could
is 4.5 liters. the manual transmission.
occur.
o Windshield washer fluid is poi-
sonous to humans and animals.
Do not drink windshield washer
fluid. Serious injury or death
could occur.
6
CHECKING THE TRANSMIS- 17
SION FLUID (AUTOMATIC)
Manual Transmission Oil Capac- G110A02HP-AAT G110B02HP-GAT
ity Transmission fluid in the automatic Recommended Fluid

transmission should be checked at Your Hyundai automatic transmission
The oil capacity of the manual trans- those intervals specified in the ve- is specially designed to operate with
mission is; hicle maintenance schedule in Sec- MOBIL DEXRON-II. Damage caused
Capacity
tion 5. by a nonspecified fluid is not covered
Engine
by your new vehicle limited warranty.
Gasoline NOTE:
3.2 liters
Diesel (2.9 CRDi) Automatic transmission fluid is ba-
2.5 liters sically a red color. As driving G110C03HP-GAT
Diesel (2.5 TCI) Transmission Fluid Capacity
distance increases, the fluid color
turns darkish red gradually. It is The fluid capacity of the automatic
normal condition and you should transmission is;
! WARNING:
not judge the need to replace based
up on the changing color. Engine Capacity
It is always better to check the trans- You must replace the automatic Gasoline 10.5 liters
mission oil level when the engine transmission fluid in accordance
is cool or cold. If the engine is hot, with intervals specified in the ve- Diesel (2.9 CRDi) 11.8 liters
you should exercise great caution hicle maintenance schedule in sec- Diesel (2.5 TCI) 8.2 liters
to avoid burning yourself on hot tion 5.
engine or exhaust parts.
! WARNING:
NOTE: The transmission fluid level should
It is recommended that the manual be checked when the engine is at
transaxle fluid should be checked normal operating temperature. This
by an authorized Hyundai dealer. means that the engine, radiator,
exhaust system etc., are very hot.
Exercise great care not to burn
yourself during this procedure.
18
G110D02HP-GAT 1. Open the hood, being careful to Diesel Engine (2.9 CRDi)
To Check the Transmission Fluid keep hands, long hair and clothing
Level clear of any moving parts.
Park the car on level ground with the Gasoline Engine
parking brake engaged. When the
transmission fluid level is checked,
the transmission fluid should be at
normal operating temperature and the
engine idling.
HHP5009
2. Remove the transmission dipstick,

wipe it clean, reinsert the dipstick
G110D01HP
as far as it will go, then remove it
Diesel Engine (2.5 TCI) again. Now check the fluid level on
the dipstick. It should be in the
"HOT" range on the dipstick.
HHP3018
While the engine is idling, apply the

brakes and move the gear selector
lever from "P" to each of its other
positions — "R", "N", "D", "2", "L" —
and then return to "N" or "P". With the G110D02HP
engine still idling:
6
19
! WARNING:
! WARNING (Diesel only):
The cooling fan is controlled by Never work on injection system with
Fluid level should be within "HOT" range engine coolant temperature and engine running or within 30 sec-
may sometimes operate even when onds after shutting off engine. High
the engine is not running. Use pressure pump, rail, injectors and
extreme caution when working near high pressure pipes are subjected
the blades of the cooling fan, so to high pressure even after the en-
that you are not injured by a rotat- gine has been switched off. The fuel
ing fan blade. As the engine cool- jet produced by fuel leaks may cause
G110D04HP
ant temperature decreases, the fan serious injury, if it contacts with the
3. If the transmission fluid level is low, will automatically shut off. This is body. People using pacemakers
use a funnel to add transmission a normal condition. should not move closer than 30cm
fluid through the dipstick tube until to the ECU or wiring harness within
the level reaches the "HOT" range. the engine room with the engine
Do not overfill. running, since the high currents in
the Common Rail system produce
considerable magnetic fields.
20 CHECKING THE BRAKES
G120A01A-AAT G120B02A-AAT G120C02A-AAT

Checking the Brake Fluid Level Recommended Brake Fluid
! CAUTION: Use only hydraulic brake fluid con-
Because brakes are essential to the ! WARNING: forming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 specifica-
tions in your braking system. Follow
safe operation of the car, it is sug- Use caution when handling brake
the instructions printed on the con-
gested that they be checked and fluid. It can damage your vision if
inspected by your Hyundai dealer. tainer.
it gets into your eyes. It will also
The brakes should be checked and damage your vehicle’s paint if
inspected for wear at those intervals spilled on it and not removed im-
specified in the vehicle maintenance mediately.
schedule in Section 5.
6
CHECKING THE CLUTCH 21
FLUID
G120D01A-AAT G120E02A-AAT G130A01A-AAT
To Check the Fluid Level Adding Brake Fluid To Check the Clutch Fluid
! WARNING:
Handle brake fluid carefully. It can
damage your vision if it gets into
your eyes. Use only DOT 3 or DOT
4 specification fluid from a sealed
container. Do not allow the fluid
can or reservoir to remain open
any longer than required. This will
HHP5015
prevent entry of dirt and moisture HHP5016
which can damage the brake sys-
The fluid level in the brake fluid reser- tem and cause improper opera- The clutch fluid level in the master
voir should be checked periodically. tion. cylinder should be checked when
The level should be between the "MIN" performing other under hood services.
and "MAX" marks on the side of the The system should be checked for
reservoir. If the level is at or below the To add brake fluid, first wipe away any leakage at the same time. Check to
"MIN" mark, carefully add fluid to dirt, then unscrew the fluid reservoir make certain that the clutch fluid level
bring it up to "MAX". Do not overfill. cap. Slowly pour the recommended is always between the "MAX" and
fluid into the reservoir. Do not overfill. "MIN" level markings on the fluid res-
Carefully replace the cap on the reser- ervoir. Fill as required. Fluid loss indi-
voir and tighten. cates a leak in the clutch system
which should be inspected and re-
paired immediately. Consult your
Hyundai dealer.
22 AIR CONDITIONING CARE
G140A01A-AAT G140B01A-AAT G140C01A-AAT

Keeping the Condenser Clean Checking the Air Conditioning Lubrication
The air conditioning condenser (and Operation To lubricate the compressor and the
engine radiator) should be checked 1. Start the engine and let it run at seals in the system, the air condition-
periodically for accumulation of dirt, fast idle for several minutes with ing should be run for at least 10
dead insects, leaves, etc. These can the air conditioning set at the maxi- minutes each week. This is particu-
interfere with maximum cooling effi- mum cold setting. larly important during cool weather
ciency. When removing such accu- 2. If the air coming out of the in-dash when the air conditioning system is
mulations, brush or hose them away vents is not cold, have the air con- not otherwise in use.
carefully to avoid bending the cooling ditioning system inspected by your
fans. Hyundai dealer.
! CAUTION:
Running the air conditioning sys-
tem for extended periods of time
with a low refrigerant level may
damage the compressor.
6
CHANGING THE CLIMATE 23
CONTROL AIR FILTER
B145A03HP-GAT
(For Evaporator and Blower Unit)
(If Installed)
The climate control air filter is located Groove
in front of the evaporator unit behind
the glove box. It helps to decrease the
amount of pollutants entering the car.
HHP2153 HHP2154
2. Lower the glove box completely by 3. Pull out the pin fixing the filter cover
pushing the both sides of the glove after pushing it to the left and fix the
box inward. pin to the groove on the filter cover.
HHP2152
1. Open the glove box and take out the

damper strap from the hole.
24 CHECKING AND REPLAC-
ING FUSES
G200A01A-AAT
Replacing a Fusible Link
Engine Compartment
Fuse and Relay Box #1
HHP2155 HHP2156
Bad Good
4. Remove the filter cover by pulling it. 5. Replace the two filters. G200A01HP
disassembly. Engine Compartment
Fuse and Relay Box #2
Bad Good
G200A02HP
6
25
A fusible link will melt if the electrical G200B02HP-GAT 1. Turn off the ignition and all other
circuits from the battery are ever over- Replacing Accessory Fuses switches.
loaded, thus preventing damage to 2. Open the fuse box and examine
the entire wiring harness. (This could each fuse. Remove each fuse by
be caused by a short in the system pulling it toward you (a small "fuse
drawing too much current.) If this puller" tool is contained in the relay
ever happens, have a Hyundai dealer and fuse box of the engine room to
determine the cause, repair the sys- simplify this operation).
tem and replace the fusible link. The
fusible links are located in a relay box
for easy inspection.
G200B01HP
! CAUTION:
The fuse box for the lights and other
electrical accessories will be found
When replacing a fusible link, never under the dashboard on the driver’s
use anything but a new fusible side. Inside the box you will find a list
link with the same or lower amper- showing the circuits protected by each
age rating. Never use a piece of fuse. HHP4002
wire or a higher-rated fusible link. If any of your car's lights or other
This could result in serious dam- electrical accessories stop working, a 3. Be sure to check all other fuses,
age and create a fire hazard. blown fuse could be the reason. If the even if you find one that appears to
fuse has burned out, you will see that have burned out.
the metal strip inside the fuse has
burned through. If you suspect a blown
fuse, follow this procedure:
26
G200C01HP-GAT
Power connector (If installed)
! CAUTION:
A burned-out fuse indicates that
there is a problem in the electrical
circuit. If you replace a fuse and it
blows as soon as the accessory is
turned on, the problem is serious
and should be referred to a
Hyundai dealer for diagnosis and
Good Burned out repair. Never replace a fuse with
G200B02L
anything except a fuse with the
4. Replace the blown fuse by pressing same or a lower amperage rating.
G200C01HP-1
a new fuse of the same rating into A higher capacity fuse could cause
place. The fuse should be a snug damage and create a fire hazard. Your vehicle is equipped with a power
fit. If it is not, have the fuse clip connector to prevent battery discharge
repaired or replaced by a Hyundai if your vehicle is parked without being
dealer. If you do not have a spare NOTE: operated for prolonged periods. Use
fuse, you may be able to borrow a See page 6-38 for the fuse panel the following procedures before park-
fuse of the same or lower rating descriptions. ing the vehicle for prolonged periods.
from an accessory you can tempo-
rarily get along without (the radio or 1. Turn off the engine.
cigarette lighter, for example). Al- 2. Turn off the headlights and tail lights.
ways remember to replace the bor- 3. Open the fuse box cover and pull up
rowed fuse. the power connector.
6
CHECKING THE BATTERY 27
NOTE: G210A01A-AAT o If battery fluid is on your skin, flush

o If the power connector is pulled the affected areas with water for at
up from the fuse panel, the warn- least 15 minutes and then seek
ing chime, audio, clock and inte- medical assistance.
rior lamps, etc., will not operate. o If battery fluid is in your eyes, rinse
The following items must be re- out your eyes with water and get
set after replacement. medical assistance as soon as
- Digital Clock possible. While you are being driven
- Trip computer to get medical assistance, continue
- Automatic heating and cooling to rinse your eyes by using a
control system sponge or soft cloth saturated with
- Audio water.
HHP5020
o Even though the power connec- o If you swallow battery fluid, drink a
tor is pulled up, the battery can large quantity of water or milk fol-
still be discharged by operation ! WARNING:
lowed by milk of magnesia, eat a
raw egg or drink vegetable oil. Get
of the headlights or other electri-
cal devices. Batteries can be dangerous! When medical assistance as soon as
working with batteries, carefully possible.
observe the following precautions
to avoid serious injuries. While batteries are being charged
(either by a battery charger or by the
The fluid in the battery contains a vehicle's alternator), they produce
strong solution of sulfuric acid, which explosive gases. Always observe
is poisonous and highly corrosive. Be these warnings to prevent injuries from
careful not to spill it on yourself or the occurring:
car. If you do spill battery fluid on
yourself, immediately do the follow- o Charge batteries only in a well ven-
ing: tilated area.
o Do not permit flames, sparks or
smoking in the area.
o Keep children away from the area.
28
G210B01Y-GET
Checking the Battery Keep batteries out of the o When lifting a plastic-cased bat-
reach of children because tery, excessive pressure on the
Keep the battery clean. Any evidence batteries contain highly case may cause battery acid to
of corrosion around the battery posts corrosive SULFURIC ACID. leak, resulting in personal in-
or terminals should be removed using Do not allow battery acid jury. Lift with a battery carrier or
a solution of household baking soda to contact your skin, eyes, with your hands on opposite
and warm water. After the battery clothing or paint finish. corners.
terminals are dry, cover them with a If any electrolyte gets into o Never attempt to charge the bat-
light coating of grease. your eyes, flush your eyes tery when the battery cables are
with clean water for at least connected.
! WARNING:
15 minutes and get imme-
diate medical attention. If
o The electrical ignition system
works with high voltage.
Always read the following possible, continue to ap- Never touch these components
instructions carefully ply water with a sponge or with the engine running or the
when handling a battery. cloth until medical atten- ignition switched on.
Keep lighted cigarettes tion is received.
and all other flames or If electrolyte gets on your
sparks away from the bat- skin, thoroughly wash the
tery. contacted area.
Hydrogen, which is a If you feel a pain or a burn-
highly combustible gas, is ing sensation, get medi-
always present in battery cal attention immediately.
cells and may explode if Wear eye protection when
ignited. charging or working near
a battery.
Always provide ventilation
when working in an en-
closed space.
6
CHECKING ELECTRIC POWER STEERING FLUID 29
COOLING FANS LEVEL
G220A01A-AAT G220B01A-AAT G230A03A-AAT
Checking Engine Cooling Fan Gasoline Engine or
! WARNING:
The engine cooling fan should come
Diesel Engine (2.5 TCI)
on automatically if the engine coolant

The cooling fan is controlled by temperature is high.
engine coolant temperature and
may sometimes operate even when
the engine is not running. Use
extreme caution when working
G220C01A-AAT
near the blades of the cooling fan,
Checking Condenser Cooling
so that you are not injured by a
rotating fan blade. As the engine Fan
G230A01HP
coolant temperature decreases the The condenser cooling fan should
fan will automatically shut off. This come on automatically whenever the Diesel Engine (2.9 CRDi)
is a normal condition. air conditioning is in operation.
HHP5014
The power steering fluid level should

be checked daily.
30 FUEL FILTER
To check the power steering fluid level, G240A01A-AAT G350A02HP-GAT
be sure the ignition is "OFF", then POWER STEERING HOSES Bleeding the Fuel System
check to make certain that the power It is suggested that you check the (For Diesel Engine (2.5 TCI))
steering fluid level is between the power steering hose connections for
"MAX" and "MIN" level markings on fluid leakage at regular intervals. The
the fluid reservoir. power steering hoses should be re-
placed if there is severe surface crack-
NOTE: ing, pulling, scuffing or worn spots.
Grinding noise from the power steer- Deterioration of the hose could cause
ing pump may be heard immedi- premature failure.
ately after the engine is started in
extremely cold conditions (below -
20°C). If the noise stops during warm
up, there is no abnormal function in
G350A01HP
the system. If is due to a power
steering fluid characteristic in ex- The fuel system should be bled to
tremely cold conditions. remove air as described in the illus-
tration if the fuel supply is exhausted
Recommended Fluid during travel, when the fuel filter is
replaced, or if the vehicle is not used
Use PSF-3 type fluid. for a long time.
NOTE: 1. Loosen the air bleed bolt at the

Do not start the engine when the upper part of the fuel filter with a
power steering oil reservoir is flat-head screwdriver or equivalent.
empty.
6
31
G300A02HP-GAT
Removal of Water from the Fuel
! WARNING: Filter
o Do not smoke or have any other (For Diesel Engine (2.5 TCI))
open flame near the vehicle while
If the fuel filter warning lamp illumi-
bleeding the fuel system.
nates during driving, it indicates that
o Be sure to carefully clean away
water has accumulated in the fuel
any fuel which spilled onto
filter. If this occurs, remove the water
nearby parts coming out of the
as described below.
air bleed bolt, because such
accumulations of fuel might ig-
G350A02HP nite and cause a fire.
2. Pump the hand pump until there are
no more bubbles in the fuel coming
out of the air bleed bolt. When doing
this, place a cloth around the air
bleed bolt to prevent the escaping
fuel from spewing about.
3. Tighten the air bleed bolt when there
are no more bubbles in the fuel.
4. Continue pumping until the hand G300A01HP
pump becomes stiff.
5. Finally, check to be sure that there 1. Loosen the drain plug at the bottom
is no leakage of fuel. of the fuel filter.
If in doubt, consult your nearest
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
32
NOTE: G350B01HP-GAT
It is recommended that water ac- Bleeding the Fuel System

cumulated in the fuel filter should (For Diesel Gngine (2.9 CRDi))
be removed by an authorized The fuel system should be bled to
Hyundai dealer. remove air as described in the illus-
tration if the fuel supply is exhausted
during travel, when the fuel filter is
! WARNING:
replaced, or if the vehicle is not used
for a long time.
o Do not smoke or have any other
G350A02HP
open flame near the vehicle while
bleeding the fuel system.
2. Operate the hand pump slowly 6 or o Be sure to carefully wipe away
7 times in order to force the water any water drained out in this
out through the drain plug. manner, because the fuel mixed
3. Tighten the drain plug when water in the water might be ignited
no longer comes out. and result in a fire.
4. Loosen the air bleed bolt and bleed
the air.
(Refer to "Bleeding the fuel sys-
tem".)
HHP5048
5. Check to be sure that the warning
lamp illuminates when the ignition 1. Pump the hand prime pump with
key is turned to "ON", and that it your hand for one minute(about
goes off when the engine is started. 20~30 times).
If in doubt, consult your nearest 2. Turn the ignition key to the "START"
authorized HYUNDAI dealer. position and release it 2~3 times
shortly until the engine starts.
6
33
G300B02HP-GAT 3. Check to be sure that the warning

Removal of Water from the Fuel
! CAUTION: Filter
lamp illuminates when the ignition
key is turned to "ON", and that it
Do not hold the ignition key in the (For Diesel Engine (2.9 CRDi)) goes off when the engine is started.
"START" position for more than If in doubt, consult your nearest
15 seconds. Doing so may cause authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
the engine and the injection pump
to damage. NOTE:
It is recommended that water ac-
cumulated in the fuel filter should
be removed by an authorized
Hyundai dealer.
HHP5047 ! WARNING:
If the fuel filter warning lamp illumi- Be sure to carefully wipe away any
nates during driving, it indicates that water drained out in this manner,
water has accumulated in the fuel because the fuel mixed in the wa-
filter. If this occurs, remove the water ter might be ignited and result in a
as described below. fire.
1. Loosen the drain plug at the bot-
tom of the fuel filter.
2. Tighten the drain plug when water
no longer comes out.
34 REPLACING HEADLIGHT
BULBS
G260A03A-GAT G270A01B-GAT 7. Disconnect the connector from the
Before attempting to replace a head- Headlight Bulb bulb base in the back of the head-
light bulb, be sure the switch is turned 1. Allow the bulb to cool. Wear eye light.
to the "OFF" position. protection.
The next paragraph shows how to 2. Open the engine hood.
reach the headlight bulbs so they 3. Always grasp the bulb by its plas-
may be changed. Be sure to replace tic base, avoid touching the glass.
the burned-out bulb with one of the 4. Using a spanner, remove the head-
same number and wattage rating. light assembly mounting bolts.
5. Disconnect the power cord from
the bulb base in the back of the
! CAUTION:
headlight.
o Keep the lamps out of contact

with petroleum product, such as G270A02HP
oil, gasoline, etc.
8. Push the bulb spring to remove the
o After heavy, driving rain or wash-
headlight bulb.
ing, headlight and taillight lenses
could appear frosty. This condi-
tion is caused by the temperature
difference between the lamp in-
side and outside. This is similar
to the condensation on your win-
dows inside your vehicle during
G270A01HP
the rain and doesn’t indicate a
problem with your vehicle. If the 6. Turn the plastic cover counterclock-
water leaks into the lamp bulb wise and remove it.
circuitry, have the vehicle checked
by an authorized Hyundai Dealer.
6
HEADLIGHT AIMING AD- 35
JUSTMENT
G290A01HP-GAT
(Low Beam)
Vertical
aiming
Horizontal
aiming
G270A03HP G270A03O
G290A01HP
9. Remove the protective cap from
the replacement bulb and install
the new bulb by matching the plas-
! WARNING:
(High Beam)
Horizontal
tic base with the headlight hole. The halogen bulb contains gas
aiming
Reattach the bulb spring and re- under pressure and if impacted
connect the connector. could shatter, resulting in flying Vertical
10.Use the protective cap and carton fragments. Always wear eye pro- aiming
to promptly dispose of the old bulb. tection when servicing the bulb.
11.Check for proper headlight aim. Protect the bulb against abrasions
or scratches and against liquids
when lighted. Turn the bulb on
only when installed in a headlight. G290A02HP
Replace the headlight if damaged
or cracked. Keep the bulb out of Before performing aiming adjustment,
the reach of children and dispose make sure of the following.
of the used bulb with care.
36
1. Keep all tires inflated to the correct And then, draw a parallel line at 38 mm G290B01HP-GAT
pressure. (1.50 in.) under the horizontal line in Adjustment After Headlight As-
2. Place the vehicle on level ground case of adjusting the low beam or at sembly Replacement
and press the front bumper & rear 21 mm (0.83 in.) under the horizontal (Low Beam) Vertical line
bumper down several times. Place line in case of adjusting the high beam. 38 mm
vehicle at a distance of 3m (118.1 Horizontal line
W
in.) from the test wall. 7. Adjust each cut-off line of the low "P"
3. See that the vehicle is unloaded beam to the parallel line with a
(except for full levels of coolant, phillips screwdriver - VERTICAL
H
engine oil and fuel, and spare tire, AIMING. Cut-off line
jack, and tools). Have the driver or 8. Adjust each cut-off line of the low
equivalent weight placed in driver's beam to the each vertical line with
L Ground
seat. a phillips screwdriver - HORIZON- H line
4. Clean the headlight lens and turn TAL AIMING.
G290B01HP-1
on the headlight.
5. Open the hood. (High Beam) Vertical line
6. Draw the vertical line (through the Horizontal line W
center of each headlight) and the 39 mm "P"
horizontal line (through the center 21 mm
of each headlight) on the aiming
screen. H
Cut-off line
(1) Horizontal line dimension from
ground :
Ground
Low Beam : 894 mm (35.1 in.) L line
High Beam : 839 mm (33 in.) H
(2) Distance between each vertical G290B02HP
line :
Low Beam : 1,316 mm (51.8 in.)
High Beam : 1,076 mm (42.4 in.)
6
37
If the vehicle has had front body repair "W"

and the headlight assembly has been Distance between each headlight
replaced, the headlight aiming should center :
be checked using an aiming screen as Low Beam : 1,316 mm (51.8 in.)
shown in the illustration. Turn on the High Beam : 1,076 mm (42.4 in.)
headlight switch. (Low Beam or High
Beam Position). "L"
Distance between the headlights
1. Adjust headlights so that main axis and the wall that the lights are
of light is parallel to center line of tested against :
the body and is aligned with point Low Beam : 3,000 mm (118.11 in.)
"P" shown in the illustration. High Beam : 3,000 mm (118.11in.)
2. Dotted lines in the illustration show
the center of headlights.
"H"
Horizontal center line of headlights
from ground :
Low Beam : 894 mm (35.1 in.)
High Beam : 839 mm (33 in.)
38 BULB WATTAGES
G280A03HP-GAT
G280A01HP
No. Part Name Wattage Socket Type No. Part Name Wattage Socket Type
1 Headlight (Low/High Beam) 55/55 Px26d/P14.5S 9 Luggage Compartment Light 10 S8.5/8.5
2 Front Position Light 5 W2.1x9.5D 10 High Mounted Rear Stop Light (If Installed) 16 W-2
3 Front Turn Signal Light 21 BA 15s 11 Rear Combination Light
4 Map Light 8 S8.5/8.5 Stop/Tail Light 21/5 BAY 15d
5 Interior Light 10 S8.5/8.5 Turn Signal Light 21 BA 15s
6 Front Fog Light 55 P22d Back-up Light 16 W2.1 x 9.5D
7 Side Repeater Light 5 W2.1 x 9.5D Rear Fog Light (If Installed) 21 BA 15s
8 Front Door Edge Warning Light (If Installed) 5 W2.1 x 4.6D 12 License Plate Light 5 W2.1 x 9.5D
6
FUSE PANEL DESCRIP- 39
TION
G200C01HP-GAT
Engine Compartment (#1)
Gasoline Engine
DESCRIPTION AMPERAGES(A) CIRCUIT PROTECTED

NO.1 100A Glow Relay (COVEC-F/EGR), Air Heater Relay (2.9 CRDi)
120A (DIESEL) Engine Compartment Fuse & Relay Box #2,
NO. 2
140A (GASOLINE) Generator
Inner Panel Fuse Box (Fuse 1,2,3,4,5),
NO. 3 50A Engine Compartment Fuse & Relay Box #1 (Fuse 8,9),
FUSIBLE Fuel Heater Control Module (COVEC-F/EGR)
LINK NO.4 30A Generator, Ignition Switch
NO.5 - -
Diesel Engine
NO. 6 - -
Engine Control Relay (Diesel Engine), Main Control Relay
NO. 7 20A
(Gasoline Engine)
NO. 8 10A Horn Relay
NO. 9 15A Front Fog Lamp Relay
FUSE NO. 10 - -
NO. 11 10A ECM (Diesel Engine), EGR Control Module
NO. 12 10A ECM (2.9 CRDi)
G200C01HP
Note:
Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of
printing. When you inspect the fuse box on your vehicle, refer to the fuse box label.
40
G200D01HP-GAT
Engine Compartment (#2)
G200C02HP
Note:
6
41

NO. 10 15A Fuel Heater and Sensor(2.9 CRDi)
NO. 11 15A Headlamp(Low beam)
NO. 12 15A Headlamp(High beam)
NO. 13 - -
NO. 14 10A A/C Compressor Relay, Triple Switch
NO. 15 10A TCI Fan Relay(COVEC-F/EGR)
NO. 16 - -
NO. 17 15A -
NO. 18 15A ECM(Diesel Engine)
FUSE NO. 19 15A ECM(Diesel Engine)
NO. 20 15A ECM(2.9 CRDi), Air Heater Relay(2.9 CRDi), EGR Solenoid(2.9 CRDi)
NO. 21 10A Illuminations, Combination Lamp
NO. 22 10A License Lamp, Combination Lamp
NO. 23 10A ABS Control Module, ABS Relay, EBD Relay
ECM(Diesel Engine), Headlamp Relay, Condenser Fan Relay
NO. 24 10A
(Gasoline/COVEC-F), EGR Solenoid(COVEC-F)
NO. 25 10A ABS Control Module
NO. 26 10A Cruise Control Module
NO. 27 15A Front Wiper and Washer
NO. 28 25A Power Seat Switch
NO. 29 20A Power Outlet Relay
42

Power Connector(A,B), Engine Compartment Fuse and Relay Box #2
NO. 1 50A
(Fuse 28,29), Inner Panel Fuse Box(Fuse 6,7,8, 9)
NO. 2 30A Start Relay, Ignition Switch
Condenser Fan Relay,
NO. 3 40A
FUSIBLE Engine Compartment Fuse and Relay Box #2(Fuse 14,15)
LINK NO. 4 40A ABS Control Module
NO. 5 30A Power Window Relay
Tail Lamp Relay,
NO. 6 40A
Engine Compartment Fuse and Relay Box #2(Fuse 11,12)
NO. 7 20A ABS Control Module
NO. 8 - -
NO. 9 20A Fuel Pump Relay, ECM, Ignition Failure Sensor
A/CON, TCM, ETACM, Data Link Connector, Siren,
NO. 30 10A
Immobilizer Control Module
Interior Lamp, Map Lamp, Audio, Instrument Cluster,
NO. 31 15A
Front Door Edge warning Lamp
6
43
G200E01HP-GAT
Inner Panel NO. AMPERAGES(A) CIRCUIT PROTECTED
1 30A Defogger Relay
2 10A Hazard Relay, Hazard Switch
3 15A Stop Lamp Switch
4 20A TOD, EST Control Module
5 10A -
6 15A Sunroof Controller
7 30A Blower Relay
8 20A Power Door Locks
9 10A Rear Fog Lamp Relay
10 10A Audio, Map Lamp
11 20A Cigarette Lighter, Power Outlet relay, ACC Socket
12 10A Power Outside Mirror Switch
13 - -
14 - -
15 10A A/C Switch
16 10A Left/Right Outside Mirror & Defogger
17 - -
18 10A TCM, ECM(COVEC-F), TCCS(TOD, EST), Immobilizer
19 10A Back-up Lamp Switch, Inside Rearview Mirror, Transmission Range Switch
20 10A Hazard Switch
21 10A Instrument Cluster, ETACM, Vehicle Speed Sensor, DRL Control Module
22 10A Airbag
23 10A Airbag Indicator
24 - -
25 10A Blower & A/C, ETACM, Defogger Relay
26 15A Seat Warmer
27 15A Sunroof, Rear Wiper & Washer, Cruise Switch, Rear Intermittent Wiper Relay
G200D01HP 28 10A Start Relay, Theft-Alarm Relay
Note:
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS
Emission Control Systems ........................................... 7-2

Catalytic Converter ...................................................... 7-3
EGR System ................................................................ 7-5
7 7
7 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS
H010A01A-GAT H010B01A-AAT
Canister
(If Installed) 1. Crankcase Emission Control
System While the engine is inoperative, fuel
Your Hyundai is equipped with an vapors generated inside the fuel tank
emission control system to meet all ; For a Gasoline Engine
are absorbed and stored in the canis-
requirements of the Emission prohibi- The positive crankcase ventilation ter. When the engine is running, the
tion rules of your province. system is employed to prevent air fuel vapors absorbed in the canister
There are three emission control sys- pollution caused by blow-by gases are drawn into the induction system
tems which are as follows. being emitted from the crankcase. through the purge control solenoid
This system supplies fresh filtered air valve.
(1) Crankcase emission control sys- to the crankcase through the air in-
tem (For a Gasoline Engine) take hose. Inside the crankcase, which Purge Control Solenoid Valve
(2) Evaporative emission control sys- the fresh air mixes with blow-by gases,
tem (For a Gasoline Engine) which then pass through the PCV The purge control solenoid valve is
(3) Exhaust emission control system valve into the induction system. controlled by the ECM; when the en-
gine coolant temperature is low, and
In order to assure the proper function during idling, it closes, so that evapo-
H010C02Y-GAT
of the emission control systems, it is rated fuel is not taken into the surge
2. Evaporative Emission tank. After engine warm-up, during
recommended that you have your car
inspected and maintained by an au- Control System ordinary driving, it opens so as to
thorized Hyundai dealer in accordance ; For a Gasoline Engine introduce evaporated fuel to the surge
with the maintenance schedule in this The Evaporative Emission Control tank.
manual. System is designed to prevent fuel
vapors from escaping into the atmo- H010D01A-AAT
sphere. 3. Exhaust Emission Control
System
The Exhaust Emission Control Sys-
tem is a highly effective system which
controls exhaust emissions while
maintaining good vehicle performance.
7
CATALYTIC CONVERTER 3
H020A01A-AAT
; For a Gasoline Engine o Do not touch the catalytic con-
! WARNING: verter or any other part of the
o Use unleaded fuel only. exhaust system while the cata-
lytic converter is hot. Shut off
o Maintain the engine in good
operating condition. Extremely the engine, wait for at least one
high catalytic converter tempera- hour before touching the cata-
lytic converter or any other part
tures can result from improper
operation of the electrical, igni- of the exhaust system.
tion or multiport electronic fuel o Remember that your Hyundai
injection. dealer is your best source of
o If your engine stalls, pings, assistance.
knocks, or is hard to start, have o Do not stop your Hyundai over
Catalytic Converter H020A01HP-D any combustible material such
your Hyundai dealer inspect and
repair the problem as soon as as grass, paper, leaves or rags.
All Hyundai vehicles are equipped
possible. These materials might contact
with a monolith type three-way cata-
o Avoid driving with a very low the hot catalytic converter and a
lytic converter to reduce the carbon
fuel level. Running out of gaso- fire might result.
monoxide, hydrocarbons and nitro-
gen oxides contained in the exhaust line may cause the engine to
gas. Exhaust gases passing through misfire and result in damage to
the catalytic converter may cause it the catalytic converter.
to operate at a very high temperature. o Avoid idling the engine for peri-
The introduction of large amounts of ods longer than 10 minutes.
unburned gasoline into the exhaust o The vehicle should not be
may cause the catalytic converter to pushed or pulled to get started.
overheat and create a fire hazard. This may cause the catalytic
This risk may be reduced by observ- converter to overheat and cre-
ing the following: ate a fire hazard.
4
H020D01HP-GAT
; For a Diesel Engine (If Installed) o Do not touch the catalytic con-
! WARNING: verter or any other part of the
exhaust system while the cata-
o Use diesel only.
lytic converter is hot. Shut off
o Maintain the engine in good
the engine, wait for at least one
operating condition. Extremely
hour before touching the cata-
high catalytic converter tempera-
lytic converter or any other part
tures can result from improper
of the exhaust system.
operation of the electrical, igni-
o Remember that your Hyundai
tion or electronic fuel injection.
dealer is your best source of
o If your engine stalls, pings, or is
assistance.
hard to start, have your Hyundai
o Do not stop your Hyundai over
Catalytic Converter dealer inspect and repair the
H020A01HP any combustible material such
problem as soon as possible.
All Hyundai vehicles are equipped as grass, paper, leaves or rags.
o Avoid driving with a very low
with oxidation type catalytic converter These materials might contact
fuel level. Running out of diesel
to reduce the carbon monoxide, hy- the hot catalytic converter and a
may cause the engine to stop
drocarbons and particulates contained fire might result.
and result in damage to the cata-
in the exhaust gas. lytic converter.
o Avoid idling the engine for peri-
ods longer than 10 minutes.
o The vehicle should not be
pushed or pulled to get started.
This may cause the catalytic
converter to overheat and cre-
ate a fire hazard.
7
EGR SYSTEM 5
H020C01HP-GAT
; For a Diesel Engine
(If Installed)
This system helps control oxides of
nitrogen by recirculating a part of the
exhaust gas into the engine, there by
reducing cylinder combustion tem-
perature.
The EGR system helps reduce Nox
(Oxides of Nitrogen) emission gas-
ses.
CONSUMER INFORMATION
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............................ 8-2

Engine Number ............................................................ 8-2
Recommended Inflation Pressures ............................. 8-3
Snow Tires ................................................................... 8-4
Tire Chains ................................................................... 8-4
Tire Rotation ................................................................ 8-5
Tire Balancing .............................................................. 8-5
8
Tire Traction ................................................................. 8-5
When to Replace Tires ................................................ 8-6
Spare Tire and Tools ................................................... 8-7
8
8 CONSUMER INFORMATION
2 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION ENGINE NUMBER
NUMBER (VIN)
I010A01A-GAT I010B01S-GAT
Gasoline engine
I010B03HP
I010A01HP I010B01HP
The engine number is stamped on
The vehicle identification number Diesel Engine (2.5 TCI) the engine block as shown in the
(VIN) is the number used in register- drawing.
ing your car and in all legal matters
pertaining to its ownership, etc.
It can be found on the identification
plate attached to the engine side of
the firewall between the engine and
passenger compartment.
I010B02HP
8
TIRE 3
I020A01A-AAT I030A02HP-GAT
PRESSURE, kPa (PSI)
TIRE INFORMATION RECOMMENDED INFLATION RIM
TIRE SIZE NORMAL LOAD MAXIMUM LOAD
The tires supplied on your new PRESSURES SIZE
FRONT REAR FRONT REAR
Hyundai are chosen to provide the
7.0Jx16 P255/65R16 200(29) 200(29) 200(29) 220(32)
best performance for normal driving.
These pressures were chosen to pro-
vide the most satisfactory combina-
tion of ride comfort, tire wear and
stability under normal conditions. Tire
pressures should be checked monthly
at least. Proper tire inflation pres-
sures should be maintained for these
reasons:
I030A01HP
The tire label located on the driver's o Lower-than-recommended tire

side of the center pillar outer panel pressures cause uneven tread wear
gives the tire pressures recommended and poor handling.
for your vehicle. o Higher-than-recommended tire
pressures increase the chance of
damage from impacts and cause
uneven tread wear.
4
I040A02S-GAT I050A03HP-AAT
SNOW TIRES TIRE CHAINS
! CAUTION: If you equip your car with snow tires, Tire chains should be installed on all
Always observe the following: they should be the same size and wheels. Be sure that the chains are
o Check pressures when the tires have the same load capacity as the installed in accordance with the
are cold. That is, after the car original tires. Snow tires should be manufacturer's instructions.
has been parked for at least three installed on all four wheels; other- To minimize tire and chain wear, do
hours and hasn't been driven wise, poor handling may result. not continue to use tire chains when
more than 1.6 km or one mile Snow tires should carry 28 kPa (4 they are no longer needed.
since starting up. psi) more air pressure than the pres-
o Check the pressure of your spare sure recommended for the standard
tire each time you check the
pressure of other tires.
tires on the tire label on the driver's
door edge, or up to the maximum
! WARNING:
o Never overload your car. Be es- pressure shown on the tire sidewall o When driving on roads covered
pecially careful about overload- whichever is less. with snow or ice, drive at less
ing if you equip your car with a Do not drive faster than 120 km/h (75 than 30 km/h (20 mph).
luggage rack or car top carrier. mph) when your car is equipped with o Use the SAE "S" class or wire &
snow tires. plastic chains.
o If you have noise caused by
chains contacting the body, re-
tighten the chain to avoid con-
tact with the vehicle body.
o To prevent body damage, re-
tighten the chains after driving
0.5 ~ 1 km.
8
5
I060A01HP-GAT I080A01A-AAT
TIRE ROTATION TIRE TRACTION
! WARNING: Tire traction can be reduced if you
Do not mix bias-ply and radial-ply drive on worn tires, tires that are
tires under any circumstances. This improperly inflated or on slippery road
may cause dangerous handling surfaces. Tires should be replaced
characteristics that may cause when tread wear indicators appear.
death, serious injury, or property To reduce the possibility of losing
damage. control, slow down whenever there is
rain, snow or ice on the road.
I070A01A-AAT
Spare tire I060A01HP TIRE BALANCING
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 A tire that is out of balance may affect
km (3,000 miles). If you notice that handling and tire wear. The tires on
tires are wearing unevenly between your Hyundai were balanced before
rotations, have the car checked by a the car was delivered but may need
Hyundai dealer so the cause may be balancing again during the years you
corrected. own the car.
After rotating, adjust the tire pres- Whenever a tire is dismounted for
sures and be sure to check wheel nut repair, it should be rebalanced before
torque. being reinstalled on the car.
6
I090A01HP-GAT
WHEN TO REPLACE TIRES hicle with any tire/wheel combi-
! WARNING: nation not recommended by
1.6 mm (0.06 in.) Hyundai for off-road driving, you
o Driving on worn-out tires is dan-
gerous! Worn-out tires can should not use these tires for
cause loss of braking effective- highway driving.
ness, steering control and trac-
tion. When replacing tires, never
mix radial and bias-ply tires on
the same car. If you replace ra-
Wear indicator dial tires with bias-ply tires, they
must be installed in sets of four.
o Your vehicle is equipped with
HHP5018
tires designed to provide for safe
The original tires on your car have ride and handling capability.
tread wear indicators. The tread wear Do not use a size and type of
indicators appear when the tread tire and wheel that is different
depth is 1.6 mm (0.06 in.). The tire from the one that was originally
should be replaced when these ap- installed on your vehicle. It can
pear as a solid bar across two or affect the safety and perfor-
more grooves of the tread. Always mance of your vehicle, which
replace your tires with those of the could lead to handling failure or
recommended size. If you change rollover and serious injury.
wheels, the new wheel's rim width When replacing the tires, be sure
and offset must meet Hyundai speci- to equip all four tires with the
fications. tire and wheel of the same size,
type, tread, brand and load-car-
rying capacity. If you neverthe-
less decide to equip your ve-
8
SPARE TIRE AND TOOLS 7
I100A01HP-AAT
HHP4011
Your Hyundai is delivered with the

following:
Spare tire and wheel

Wrench
Jack
Jack handle (Spare Wheel Rod)
VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS
Measurement ................................................................ 9-2

Engine ........................................................................... 9-3
Lubrication Chart .......................................................... 9-4
9 9
9 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS
2
J010A02HP-GAT J030A02HP-GAT
MEASUREMENT mm TIRE Kpa(psi)
Overall length 1
4700 (4765* ) Tire Size Inflation Pressure
Overall width 1860 Standard 255/65 R16
200kPa (29 psi)
Overall height 2
1795 (1840* ) Spare Full Size
Wheel base 2750
J040A02HP-GAT
Wheel tread Front 1530 ELECTRICAL
Rear 1530
DIESEL
*1: With Bumper Guard ITEM GASOLINE
*2: With Roof Rack 2.5 TCI 2.9 CRDi
Battery MF 68AH MF 90AH MF 100AH
J020A01HP-GAT
Alternator 120A (13.5V) 90A (12 V) 110A (12V)
POWER STEERING
Ball and nut, torsion bar type J050A02HP-GAT
Type BRAKE
(Integral type)
Wheel free play 0 ~ 30 mm (0 ~ 1.18 in.) Type Dual hydraulic with brake booster
Oil pump type Vane type Front brake type Ventilated disc
Rear E.C only Disc type
J060A01Y-GAT brake Disc type (with ABS)
Except E.C
FUEL SYSTEM type Drum type (without ABS)
Fuel tank capacity 75 liter Parking brake Cable operated on rear wheel
9
ENGINE 3
J070A04HP-GAT
Gasoline Engine Diesel Engine

ITEMS
3.5 V6 2.5 TCI 2.9 CRDi
Engine Type 6-Cyl., V-type DOHC 4-Cyl., In-line SOHC 4-Cyl., In-line DOHC
Bore x Stroke 93.0 x 85.8 mm (3.67 x 3.38 in.) 91.1 x 95 mm (3.59 x 3.74 in.) 97.1 x 98 mm (3.82 x 3.86 in.)
Displacement 3497cc 2476cc 2902cc
Compression Ratio 10 22 16.5
Firing Order 1-2-3-4-5-6 1-3-4-2 ←
Valve clearance Cold Auto lash 0.15 mm Auto lash
(Intake/Exhaust) Hot Auto lash 0.25 mm Auto lash
Idle Speed (rpm) 800 750 ± 100 800 ± 100
Injection (or lgnition) Timing BTDC 5° ± 2° ATDC 7° ± 1° Automatically Adjusted
9 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS
4 LUBRICATION CHART
J080A11HP-GAT
Item Oil & Grease Standard Q'ty (liter)

Engine Oil API SJ, SL or ABOVE, SAE 5W-20, 5W-30
Gasoline Drain and refill (With oil filter) : 4.3
ILSAC GF-3 or ABOVE SAE 10W-30 [ABOVE -18°C(-0.4°F)]
SAE 15W-40 [ABOVE -13°C(8.6°F)]
SAE 20W-50 [ABOVE -7°C(19.4°F)]
Recommends Diesel API CF-4 or ABOVE, SAE #30 [ABOVE 0°C(32°F)] Drain and refill (With oil filter) : 5.1
(2.5 TCI) ACEA B2 or B3 SAE 20W-40 [ABOVE -10°C(14°F)]
SAE 15W-40 [ABOVE -15°C(5°F)]
SAE 10W-30 [-20°C ~ 40°C (-4°F ~ 104°F)]
SAE 5W-30 [-25°C ~10°C (-13°F ~ 50°F)]
SAE 0W-30 [BELOW 10°C(50°F)] *1
Diesel API CF-4 or ABOVE, SAE 15W-40 [ABOVE -15°C (5°F)] Drain and refill (With oil filter) :
(2.9 CRDi) ACEA B4 or ABOVE SAE 10W-30 [-20°C ~ 40°C(-4°F ~ 104°F)] 2WD : 6.6
SAE 5W-30 [-25°C~40°C (-13°F~104°F)] 4WD : 6.0
SAE 0W-30 [BELOW 10°C(50°F)] *1
*1. Restricted by driving condition and dealing area
Engine Oil Consumption Normal driving condition MAX. 1L /1500 Km
Severe driving condition MAX. 1L /1000 Km
9
5
J080A11HP-GAT
Item Oil & Grease Standard Q'ty (liter)

Transmission Manual HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS MTF 75W/85 (API GL-4) 2.5 (2.5 TCI), 3.2 (2.9 CRDi or 3.5 V6)
Fluid Automatic MOBIL DEXRON-II 8.2 (2.5 TCI), 11.8 (2.9 CRDi ), 10.5 (3.5 V6)
Transfer Case Oil ATF DEXRON-III 1.42
Front Axle Gear Oil HYPOID GEAR OIL API GL-5 or HIGHER, Part-time 4WD : 1.8
SAE 80W[BELOW -30°C(-22°F)]/90W[ABOVE -30°C(-22°F)] Full-time 4WD : 1.3
Rear Axle MITSUBISHI GENUINE GEAR OIL PART NO. 8149630EX or
Gear Oil CASTROL HYPOY LS(2.5 TCI)
With LSD
MOBIL INFILREX 33 or MOBILUBE LS 85W-90
NO.7 : 2.6, NO.7.5 : 2.8
(2.9 CRDi or 3.5 V6)
Without HYPOID GEAR OIL API GL-5 or HIGHER,
LSD SAE 80W[BELOW -30°C(-22°F)]/90W[ABOVE -30°C(-22°F)]
Coolant Ethylene glycol base for aluminum radiator 8(2.5 TCI), 9(2.9 CRDi), 11(3.5 V6)
Power Steering Oil PSF-3 TYPE FLUID 1.3
Brakes and Clutch Fluid DOT 3, DOT 4 or Equivalent As required
INDEX
10
10
10 INDEX
2
A CD Auto changer (H280) ................................. 1-92, 1-135

Air bag ....................................................................... 1-47 Center Console Compartment .................................... 1-87
Air Cleaner Filter ........................................................ 6-13 Center console armrest .......................................... 1-87
Air Conditioning Center console box ................................................. 1-87
Care ........................................................................ 6-22 Child Restraint System .............................................. 1-39
Operation ..................................................... 1-111, 6-22 Child-Protector Rear Door Lock ................................. 1-12
Switch ................................................................... 1-111 Cigarette Lighter ........................................................ 1-79
Antenna ................................................................... 1-141 Climate Control air Filter ................................. 1-119, 6-23
Ashtray ...................................................................... 1-81 Clock ......................................................................... 1-78
Audio Fault Code ..................................................... 1-138 Clutch
Automatic Heating and Cooling Control System ...... 1-113 Checking fluid ......................................................... 6-21
Combination Light
B Daytime running lights ............................................ 1-74
Battery .............................................................. 2-26, 6-27 Headlight flasher ..................................................... 1-75
Bi-Level Heating ...................................................... 1-109 Headlight switch ..................................................... 1-73
Brake High-beam switch ................................................... 1-74
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ................................ 2-21 Lane change signal ................................................. 1-73
Checking the brakes ............................................... 6-20 Parking light auto cut ............................................. 1-74
Fluid ........................................................................ 6-20 Turn signal operation .............................................. 1-73
Practices ................................................................ 2-22 Compact Disc Player Operation (H280) ................... 1-132
Breaking-In your New Hyundai .................................... 1-3 Cooling Fans ............................................................. 6-29
Corrosion protection
C Cleaning the interior .................................................. 4-6
Care of Cassette Tapes .......................................... 1-140 Protecting your Hyundai from corrosion ................... 4-2
Care of Discs .......................................................... 1-139 Washing and waxing ................................................. 4-4
Cargo Security Screen .............................................. 1-94 Cruise Control .......................................................... 1-101
Cassette Tape Player Operation (H240) .................. 1-125
Cassette Tape Player Operation (H280) .................. 1-130
Catalytic Converter ...................................................... 7-3
INDEX
10
3
D F
Defrosting/Defogging ................................................ 1-110 Fan Speed Control ........................................ 1-105, 1-116
Door Fog Light Switch
Locking and unlocking front door with a key .......... 1-11 Front ....................................................................... 1-75
Drink Holder ............................................................... 1-81 Rear ........................................................................ 1-75
Driving Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) ............................................ 2-14
Driving for economy ............................................... 2-23 Front Seats
Smooth cornering.................................................... 2-25 Adjustable front seats ............................................ 1-18
Winter driving .......................................................... 2-25 Adjustable headrests.............................................. 1-19
Adjusting seat forward and rearward ..................... 1-18
E Adjusting seatback angle ....................................... 1-19
Emission Control System ........................................... 7-1 Front/Rear Window Defroster Switch ....................... 1-78
Catalytic converter ................................................... 7-3 Fuel
EGR System ............................................................ 7-5 Capacity ................................................................... 9-2
Engine Diesel ....................................................................... 1-2
Before starting the engine ....................................... 2-3 Gauge .................................................................... 1-65
Compartment (3.5 V6) ............................................. 6-2 Unleaded gasoline ................................................... 1-2
Compartment (2.5 TCI) ............................................ 6-3 Fuel Filler Lid
Compartment (2.9 CRDi) ......................................... 6-4 Remote release ...................................................... 1-96
Coolant ................................................................... 6-10 Full-time 4WD Operation ............................................ 2-17
Coolant temperature gauge ..................................... 1-65 Fuses ........................................................................ 6-24
If the engine overheats ............................................. 3-4
Number ..................................................................... 8-2 G
Oil ............................................................................. 6-6 General Checks ........................................................... 6-5
Starting ..................................................................... 2-5 Glove Box ................................................................. 1-86
Engine Exhaust Can Be Dangerous ............................ 2-2
H
Hazard Warning System ............................................ 1-77
Headlight Aiming Adjustment ..................................... 6-35
10 INDEX
4
Headlight Leveling Device System .......................... 1-100 L

Heating and Ventilation ............................................ 1-105 Limited-Slip Differential .............................................. 2-22
Air flow control ........................................... 1-106, 1-117 Luggage Compartment
Temperature control .............................................. 1-108 Cargo Security Screen ........................................... 1-94
High-Mounted Rear Stop Light ................................... 1-95 Light ........................................................................ 1-93
Hood Release ............................................................ 1-97 Net .......................................................................... 1-93
Horn ........................................................................... 1-99
M
I Maintenance Intervals
Ignition Switch ............................................................. 2-3 Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ......... 5-9
Immobilizer System ..................................................... 1-5 Maintenance under severe usage conditions .......... 5-8
Limp Home Procedures ................................... 1-7, 1-9 Scheduled maintenance ........................................... 5-4
Key ................................................................... 1-5, 1-8 Service requirements ............................................... 5-2
Indicator and Warning Lights .................................... 1-58 Mirrors
Instrument Cluster and Indicator Lights ................... 1-54 Day/night inside rearview ........................................ 1-90
Instrument Panel Light Control (Rheostat) ............... 1-79 Outside rearview ..................................................... 1-88
Interior Light .............................................................. 1-85 Multimeter .................................................................. 1-69
Intermittent Wiper ..................................................... 1-77 Altimeter ................................................................. 1-70
Barometer ............................................................... 1-72
J Digital Clock ........................................................... 1-72
Jump Starting .............................................................. 3-3 Electrical azimuth compass ................................... 1-70
Relative altimeter .................................................... 1-71
K
Key .............................................................................. 1-4 O
If you lose your keys ............................................. 3-17 Odometer ................................................................... 1-67
Positions ................................................................... 2-4
P
Parking Brake ............................................................ 1-91
Part-time 4WD Operation ........................................... 2-14
INDEX
10
5
Power Driver's Seat ................................................... 1-21 Steering Wheel

Power Outlet .............................................................. 1-80 Steering wheel tilt lever ........................................ 1-100
Power Steering Fluid Level ........................................ 6-29 Stereo Radio Operation (H240, H280) .......... 1-122, 1-127
Stereo Sound System ............................................. 1-120
R Sun roof ..................................................................... 1-83
Rear Seat Warning ................................................... 1-31 Sun visor ................................................................... 1-98
Rear Window Defroster Switch ................................ 1-78 Sunshade ................................................................... 1-83
Roof Rack ................................................................. 1-94
T
S Tachometer ............................................................... 1-66
Seat Belts Tail Gate .................................................................... 1-92
3-Point system ............................................. 1-34, 1-37 Theft-Alarm system ................................................... 1-13
2-Point Static Type ................................................ 1-36 Third Seat
Adjusting your seat belt ......................................... 1-35 Adjusting Seatback Angle ...................................... 1-27
Care of seat belts .................................................. 1-33 Folding Rear Seatback and seat cushion ............. 1-28
Precautions ............................................................ 1-31 To get in and out of the third seat ........................ 1-30
Pretensioner Seat Belt ........................................... 1-45 Tires
Seat Warmer ............................................................. 1-23 Balancing .................................................................. 8-5
Second Seat Chains ...................................................................... 8-4
Adjusting seatback angle ....................................... 1-24 Changing a flat tire .................................................. 3-7
Adjustable headrests.............................................. 1-24 If you have a flat tire ............................................... 3-7
Folding rear seatback and seat cushion ............... 1-25 Information ............................................................... 8-3
Side Under View Mirror .............................................. 1-90 Pressure ................................................................... 8-3
Sound Replacement ............................................................. 8-6
Brake Pad Wear Warning Sound .......................... 1-65 Rotation .................................................................... 8-5
Speedometer ............................................................. 1-67 Snow tires ................................................................ 8-4
Starting Procedure ....................................................... 2-5 Spare tire .................................................................. 3-5
Traction ..................................................................... 8-5
10 INDEX
6
Towing
A trailer (or vehicle) ................................................ 2-28
Emergency ............................................................. 3-16
If your car must be towed ...................................... 3-14
Transmission
Automatic transmission ............................................ 2-9
Automatic transmission fluid checking ................... 6-17
Manual transmission ................................................. 2-7
Manual transmission oil checking ........................... 6-16
Trip Odometer ............................................................ 1-67
U
Under Tray ................................................................ 1-23
V
Vehicle Identification Number ..................................... 8-2
Vehicle Specifications ................................................. 9-1
W
Warning Lights ........................................................... 1-39
Windows
Power ..................................................................... 1-17
Windshield Wiper and Washer ................................... 1-75
Rear Wiper and Washer Switch .............................. 1-77
Windshield Wiper Blades ........................................... 6-14
Printing : JUL. 11, 2006
Publication No.:AH1O-EE67F
Seoul Korea Printed in Korea

2007 Hyundai Terracan 33

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2007 Hyundai Terracan 33

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

A000A01A-GAT

Modification of components may void the manufacturer's warranty

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2

CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE 4

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS 5

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS 7

This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE.

3. How can you tell if you purchas-

A100A01L A100A02L A100A04L

Low Oil Pressure Warning Light A/T(Automatic Transmission)

Fuel Recommendations ............................................... 1-2

3 minutes for a catalytic converter don't drive so slowly in too high a

B030B01A-AAT B880A01HP-GAT B880B02HP-GAT

A code number is stamped on the Type B

(1) ID key (3) If you need additional keys or if you B880C01A-GAT

B885C01O-GAT The key number should be recorded B885D01O-GAT

The vehicle key number is recorded

NOTE: NOTE: B030C01Y-AAT

B040A02Y-AAT B040B01A-AAT B040C02Y-DAT

B040D01S-AAT B040E04A-AAT If you wish to be able to open the door

the rear seat. The central door locking switch is lo-

NOTE: B070A01A-AAT B070B01O-AAT

o When pushing the front portion (If Installed) Armed Stage

Park the car and stop the engine. Arm

1) Remove the ignition key from the B070C01HP-GAT

After completion of the steps above,

1) A front or rear door is opened with-

Battery type : CR2032(Type A) Transmitter

Replacement instructions: MSO-0048-2

Type A: 2. Remove the old battery from the HMXOM033-2

1. Carefully separate the case with a

To move the seat toward the front or

B080F01S-AAT B090A02Y-AAT B090B01L-AAT

2. To fold down the seatback , first

4. To secure the seat, hook the secur- NOTE:

5. Fix the seat belt buckle in the groove

securely in the rear seat. NEVER place B150F01A-AAT

B160A01A-AAT B160C01A-AAT B170A04A-AAT

To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of

the proper length only after the lap belt

To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of B200A01S-GAT B210A01A-AAT

B220A01A-AAT B220B01A-AAT B220C01A-AAT

so that the seat belt will properly

B230H03HP-GAT U : Suitable for "universal" category B230B02A-AAT

B230C02HP-GAT the headrest and between the head- B230D04E-GAT

ISOFIX is a standardized method of

An ISOFIX-seat can only be installed if NOTE:

according to the installing-manual,

1. To engage the child restraint seat to

o Improper handling of the pre-

o No objects should be placed over dren to ride in the front passen-

B240B01HP-GAT The SRS service reminder indicator

B240B01L Upon deployment, tear seams molded

o Do not install a child restraint o Do not replace the bumper or the

1. Tachometer 14.Front Fog Indicator Light

1. Tachometer 16.Overdrive Off Indicator Light (If Installed)

Your Hyundai is equipped with dual- B260J01S-GAT B260A01B-GAT

B260B01B-GAT B260N02A-AAT B260Q01HP-DAT

checked. Cruise Indicator Light

(If Installed) 4WD HIGH Indicator Light

! CAUTION: ! CAUTION: ! CAUTION(2.9 CRDi only):

B270A01A-GAT B280A01A-AAT B290A02A-AAT

approximate fuel level in the fuel tank.